Home

FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide

1. 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the alarm list looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard and how scrolling works for the list In the Alarm tab specify the columns to include in the list the number of lines per alarm and the triggers to filter by if any In the Display tab specify the types of alarms to display in the list and the appearance of the different alarm conditions In the Common tab specify the alarm list s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tags or expressions to use to control the type of alarms to display in the list The use of these connections is optional For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up alarm banners The alarm banner graphic object displays a single unacknowledged alarm message For example the banner could display a message that warns the operator that the pressure in a boiler is too high The ALARM display and the ALARM BANNER graphic library both contain an alarm banner object You can use the displays and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using alarm banners see page 9 33 To set up an alarm banner 1 Double click the alarm banner 21 59 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITI
2. Appearance Border style Back style Solid S Shape Rectangle Value Write on close Touch margins Horizontal margin fo Other MV Audio Cancel Help Border width 4 Pattern style None m Vertical margin 0 M Border uses back color BB Back Color BB Border Color _ Pattern Color E Highlight color l Blink 21 Setting up graphic objects In the button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab For details about the options in the tabs see Help In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to write out a value when the display closes In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tag with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags see page 20 36 When you are finished click OK up display list selectors The display list selector is a list of graphic displays in the application Each graphic display is represented by a different state in the display list selector An operator can scroll through the list of displays and then select the display to open by pressing an enter button or Enter key For more information about using display list selectors see page 13 6 To set up a display list selector L Double click the disp
3. OF EE 3 In the dialog box that opens select the object to add to your graphic display For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 Click OK The object is placed in the display Depending on how the third party implemented the object it might be a different size than the rectangle you drew 5 To specify the object s properties and assign tags or expressions to its connections do one of the following m Right click the object and then click Properties to open the object s Properties dialog box Depending on how the third party implemented the object it might not have a Properties dialog box If the Properties menu item is not available use the next method m Right click the object and then click Property Panel 6 In the Properties dialog box or Properties tab of the Property Panel specify the object s properties 7 If desired set up the properties in the Common tab as described on page 21 1 8 Inthe Connections tab assign tags or expressions to the object s connections 9 To close the Properties dialog box click OK To close the Property Panel click the Close button For information about using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 k Select tool 20 Using graphic objects Tools and tips for working with objects This section describes features of the Graphics editor that help you work
4. Information message display Messages about the process prompts or instructions and information about current states For details see page 27 6 Local message display Ongoing information about the status of devices or processes For details see page 19 29 Selecting tools for creating graphic objects The Objects menu in the Graphics editor contains items for creating objects as well as items for selecting and rotating objects You can also create most objects using the tools on the Objects toolbar k Select tool Objects menu w Select Rotate Drawing Push Button Numeric and String Display Navigation Indicator Gauge and Graph Trending RecipeFlus Key Advanced Import T F F F FEF FO F F F 20 Using graphic objects Objects toolbar Objects Ea k o Amo COK N Sm meee 2 gt m g ie m ie yt es el e E Ab lv az q gt Fe HRPeoune i Ge Go A amp ou Before you can create an object you must select the object s tool either by clicking a menu item or by clicking the tool on the toolbar When you position a cursor over a tool on the toolbar the name of the tool is displayed in a tooltip and in the status bar To select a tool 1 Click the tool on the toolbar or on the Objects menu When you click a tool the pointer changes to show which tool is active z Freehand tool Text Text tool To deselect a tool do one of the following
5. If desired you can include a Compare column in the table to compare tag values to data sets at a glance If you choose this option FactoryTalk View displays an X in the Compare column when the tag value and data set value for an ingredient differ Ingredients with an X are listed first 29 Setting up RecipePlus RecipePlus button Use the RecipePlus button to perform actions on the selected recipe s ingredients The recipe is selected using the RecipePlus selector object Set up a separate RecipePlus button for each action you want to perform Download write the data set values to tags for all the ingredients in the selected recipe Upload vwrite tag values to the data set for all the ingredients in the selected recipe If all values are uploaded successfully the recipe file is saved Upload and Create write tag values for all the ingredients in the selected recipe to a new data set creating a new unit The operator is prompted for a name for the new unit If all values are uploaded successfully the recipe file is saved The new data set is named Data Set n where n is the next available number starting at 1 that will create a unique data set name Restore display the selected recipe in the RecipePlus table Save save the data set values for the recipe file and unit displayed in the RecipePlus table If the operator made changes in the data set values using the string pop up keyboard or numeric pop up keypad t
6. At run time when the value of Conveyor_1_status changes to 1 the first message is displayed in the default information message display When the value of Conveyor_2_status changes to 1 the second message is displayed Information messages and trigger values Create messages associated with each tag value change that you want to inform the operator about Assign each message a trigger value and set up the data source to send the trigger value to the Value connection You can use both HMI and data server tags The trigger value can be any non zero integer value positive or negative Trigger values do not need to be contiguous but they must be unique for each message For example you could use trigger values of 1 2 and 3 or values of 10 20 and 30 Trigger values cannot be 0 Digital tags have two possible values 0 and 1 Therefore if you use a digital tag you can only use the value to trigger a message If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different messages create an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag s value That way you can use the trigger values and 2 If you use an analog tag or an expression you can use any non zero integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 You can create multiple information message files but you can use only one message file at run time For informat
7. FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE visible states in the piloted control list selector For information about using array tags see page 9 15 To set up a piloted control list selector 1 Double click the piloted control list selector Piloted Control List Selector Properties Ea General States Timing Common Connections m Appearance Border style Border width IV Border uses back color Raisedinset fe E Back color BB Border color Pattern style C Pattern color None _ Selection back color I Selection fore color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial zho Bi 7T pee haracter Number of states Eo Buttons V Write on enter M Key navigation V Wrap around 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m In the General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether to write out a value when the operator presses the Enter key whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top m Inthe States tab set up the value and caption for each state Also specify whether each state can be selected and by whom For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about
8. For more information about setting up languages for your application see Chapter 12 For a list of RFC1766 names see Appendix F Language switching alarm information and local messages in RSView ME Station 4 00 FactoryTalk View 5 00 provides direct support for switching message languages at run time For applications that will run in RSView ME Station version 4 00 you can use the CurrentLanguage expression function to set up language switching for messages To do this set up trigger value offsets for series of messages in the Alarm Setup editor information message files and local message files Export the text strings in the Alarm Setup editor and message files for translation Then paste the translated strings into the editor and original message files and assign each string the correct trigger value For information about exporting text for translation see Chapter 12 Example Setting up information messages in multiple languages This example shows how to generate English French or German information messages at run time in an RS View ME Station 4 00 application depending on which language the application is using 1 Create a tag called Information_messages that will generate trigger values of 11 to 20 for different conditions that require information messages 2 Create an information message file 3 Create English messages for trigger values 11 to 20 Tip Messages are sorted alphanumerically in the Excel spreadsh
9. To see how the buttons work with the RecipePlus selector and table open the RecipePlus_Components graphic library see page 29 10 and start test mode For information about creating buttons see Chapter 20 For details about setting up the buttons see page 21 16 Example Editing and downloading recipe values at run time This example shows how to use the RecipePlus graphic objects to edit and download recipe values at run time 1 In the RecipePlus editor create a RecipePlus file containing ingredients several data sets a tag set and several units combining the different data sets with the tag set 2 Open the RecipePlus_Components library 3 Start test mode 4 Use the move up and move down buttons next to the RecipePlus selector to highlight a unit in the selector and then press the Restore button The unit s ingredients are displayed in the RecipePlus table with the data set values in the Recipe column 29 Setting up RecipePlus 5 Use the move up and move down buttons next to the RecipePlus table to select an ingredient and then press the Enter button The numeric pop up keypad opens displaying the minimum and maximum values for the ingredient If the ingredient is a string ingredient the string pop up keyboard opens 6 Type a new value for the ingredient and then press Enter The new value is displayed in the Recipe column 7 Press the Save button to save the new value 8 Press the Download button
10. To use the RecipePlus_ Components graphic library 1 Open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder 2 Double click the RecipePlus_Components library 3 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects into your display Using buttons with recipe objects gt Kd lt ml You can use button graphic objects with the RecipePlus selector and table to select the recipe and unit to work with and to select ingredients in the table 29 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 12 You can link buttons to a specific recipe object or set up a button to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 Use these buttons with recipe objects This button Does this Move up Moves the highlight bar up one item in the list Move down Moves the highlight bar down one item in the list Page up Moves the highlight bar up one page in the list Page down Moves the highlight bar down one page in the list Home Moves the highlight bar to the top item in the list End Moves the highlight bar to the bottom item in the list Enter table only Opens the numeric keypad or string keyboard for the operator to edit the data set value If a numeric ingredient has a minimum and maximum value defined these values are displayed in the numeric keypad If the table is defined as View only the operator cannot edit it
11. bold false gt The syntax for specifying an attribute for an element is attribute value The attribute value must be enclosed in single or double quotes Here is a sample structure for a graphic display XML document containing two graphic objects The second object has states Element lt gfx gt lt displaySettings gt lt objectI gt lt caption gt lt imageSettings gt lt animations gt lt animate Visibility gt lt animateColor gt lt animations gt lt connections gt lt connection name Value gt lt connection name Indicator gt lt connections gt lt objectl gt lt object2 gt lt states gt Description Root element Contains attributes from the Display Settings dialog box in the Graphics editor Contains attributes from the General and Common tabs in the object s Properties dialog box as well as elements for the object s caption image animation and connections Contains attributes for the object s caption Contains attributes for the object s image Contains an animation element for each type of animation set up for the object Contains attributes for Visibility animation Contains attributes for Color animation Indicates the end of the animations element Contains a connection element for each connection assigned to the object Contains attributes for the Value connection Contains attributes for the In
12. m Double click an empty area in the display m Click the Select tool m Click another tool 20 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 12 For some drawing objects double clicking an empty area of the display creates another instance of the object For these objects to finish drawing click the Select tool For more information see the instructions for creating drawing objects beginning on page 20 12 Before you begin creating objects To size and position objects precisely as you create them use the grid To use the grid 1 On the View menu click Show Grid and then click Snap On For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 The next sections describe how to create graphic objects For information about setting up graphic objects once you ve created them see Chapter 21 For information about attaching animation to the objects you create see Chapter 22 Creating graphic objects This section applies to graphic objects in general ActiveX objects and some drawing objects require extra steps to create them For details about creating drawing objects see the next section For information about ActiveX objects see page 20 21 To create a graphic object 1 Select the tool for the object to create 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw a rectangle the general size you want the object to be 3 Double click the object to open its Properties dial
13. 20 44 Duplicate also duplicates actions For example if you duplicate an object move it and then duplicate it again the second Duplicate will in one step duplicate and move the object This is useful for creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them Select object Duplicate object Move object Duplicate again Duplicate works until you deselect the object Resizing objects You can resize objects using the mouse or using the keyboard The keys let you resize objects in small increments You can also use the grid to resize objects precisely Another option is to size an object using the object s Height and Width properties in the Property Panel This method is especially useful for quickly resizing multiple objects to the same size For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also specify an object s size using the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box For more information see page 21 1 When you resize text objects if you have selected the Size to fit option the font size is adjusted to fit the new object size as closely as possible To automatically align objects to the grid as you resize them 1 On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 To resize an object using the mouse 1 Select the object wA P olygon tool A 20 Using gra
14. Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial J fo B z u A eee Iv Word wrap Cancel Help In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the information message display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the information message display s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help When you are finished click OK 99 Animating graphic objects This chapter describes m the types of animation and which objects support which types of animation m using the Animation dialog box m testing animation m using tag names tag placeholders and expressions when attaching animation m setting the minimum and maximum values for animation that uses a range of motion m using Object Smart Path to define an object s range of motion m setting up each type of animation m applying animation to groups m checking what kind of animation is attached to an object m copying and pasting animation m setting up animation for global objects Types of animation Animation associates graphic objects with tags so the appearance or position of an object changes to reflect changes to the tag s value For example an object s color could change from yellow to orange to red as the tag s value increases Or a slider could move from left to right as a tag s value increases You can use these typ
15. If errors occur during importing the errors are logged to a text file The file opens automatically when importing is finished The last paragraph of the file lists the location of the file Importing alarm XML files To import alarm information from an XML file 1 In the Explorer window right click the Alarm Setup editor 2 Click Import and Export The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For more information about using the Alarm Import Export Wizard see Help Alarm setup XML file structure The alarm setup XML file is a FactoryTalk View XML document that describes the alarm setup for an application The root element of the XML document is called alarms It represents the Alarm Setup editor An XML document can contain only one root element All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element In an XML document the start of an element is marked lt element name gt The end is marked lt element name gt If the element contains no subelements the end can be marked gt For example lt trigger id T1 type value ack all value 0 gt The syntax for specifying an attribute for an element is attribute value The attribute value must be enclosed in single or double quotes Here is a sample structure for an alarm XML document Element Description lt alarms gt Root element lt alarm gt Contains attributes from
16. Remote I O alias with a BitArray data type Assign a different data type to the alias Global object parameter definition or value Delete the global object parameter definition The corresponding value will be deleted automatically Use parameter files instead Features that are not supported in version 3 20 or earlier The features listed in the previous table are not supported in version 3 20 of RSView ME Station In addition these version 4 00 features are not supported in version 3 20 of RS View ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Unsupported RSLinx Enterprise feature or shortcut warning Do this Delete or replace the feature or shortcut A hardware patch might be available that allows you to use the feature Therefore the runtime application file will still be created Unsupported RSLinx Enterprise feature or shortcut error Delete or replace the feature or shortcut Global reference object that is not linked to a global base object Language switch button graphic object Password button graphic object Delete the global reference object or link it to a global base object All global reference objects that are linked to global base objects will be converted to standard graphic objects in the mer file Delete the button Delete the button RecipePlus button graphic object Recip
17. When an object is copied any animation attached to the object is also copied If a group is copied the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original Copying objects with multiple languages If an object has multiple language strings set up copying the object copies all the languages If the object is pasted into an application with different languages only the strings for languages that are used by the application are pasted If the new application has languages that are not set up for the object those language strings are undefined and will be displayed with single question marks For more information about setting up multiple languages see Chapter 12 To copy objects in the same display 1 Select one or more objects 2 Drag the object and then press Ctrl When you press Ctrl a plus sign is added to the cursor 3 When the object is where you want it release the mouse button and then the Ctrl key A new copy of the object is created If you selected several objects dragging one of the objects copies all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other To drag objects between displays 1 Open both displays or a graphic library and a display 2 Position or resize the displays so both are visible For more information see page 19 13 d Cut tool Copy tool i Paste tool AR Duplicate tool 20 Using graphic objects 3 Select one
18. developing a hierarchy for 13 1 exporting to XML H 1 illustrating 20 2 importing XML H 3 limiting access to 11 9 maximum number licensed to use 4 18 navigating between 13 1 objects for 13 3 testing navigation 13 3 numbering 8 4 8 5 opening 19 3 planning 3 3 19 2 printing 19 29 atrun time 19 30 remotely 8 5 19 30 setting up printer 15 10 setting up 19 11 sizing 4 12 19 13 testing 19 10 animation 22 5 title barin 4 15 types of 19 12 default type 19 3 using parameter files with 25 2 viewing in detail 19 9 Graphic Displays editor 19 3 undoing and redoing actions in 19 10 using tags in 6 9 Graphic images importing 19 20 monochrome 19 21 that come with FactoryTalk View Studio a 19 21 viewing 19 22 Graphic libraries 19 15 ALARM BANNER display 9 26 ALARM MULTI LINE display 9 6 9 26 9 27 changing file location for 19 19 copying 9 30 creating 19 15 HISTORY display 9 6 9 29 opening 19 15 RecipePlus_Components library 29 10 saving with multiple languages 19 17 setting up for multiple languages 12 14 Sliders library 22 14 STATUS display 9 6 9 28 Trends library 28 10 Graphic Libraries editor 19 15 Graphic object types acknowledge alarm button 20 7 21 16 acknowledge all alarms button 20 8 21 16 ActiveX objects 20 2 20 21 alarm banner 20 10 21 59 alarm list 20 10 21 58 alarm status list 20 10 21 60 alarm s
19. 1 On the View menu click Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Also data logging is not turned on in test mode Using the Trends graphic library 28 10 The Trends graphic library contains a trend graphic object and buttons for controlling the trend It also contains numeric display objects that display the value of each tag used in the trend You can use the trend and objects as they are or you can edit them to suit your needs To use the objects drag and drop or copy and paste them into your graphic display For information about copying and pasting objects from the graphic libraries see page 20 43 f Trends Malthouse Clgx 640x48077 Library 28 Setting up trends To use the Trends graphic library 1 Open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder 2 Double click the Trends library 3 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects into your display Using buttons to control the trend at run time You can use button graphic objects with the trend to allow the operator to pause the trend switch between pens or scroll the trend You can link buttons to a specific trend object or set up a button to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about linking butt
20. 29 10 The RecipePlus_Components graphic library contains a RecipePlus selector and table and buttons for working with the objects It also contains a bar graph and multistate indicator that display the status of recipe operations Use test mode to see how the different RecipePlus objects work together In test mode the RecipePlus selector in the library displays any recipe files and units that you have created in your application 29 Setting up RecipePlus You can use the objects in the library as they are or you can edit them to suit your needs To use the objects drag and drop or copy and paste them into your graphic display For information about copying and pasting objects from the graphic libraries see page 20 43 r RecipePlus_Components Condiments Library Recipe Selection recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit Recipe Status Recipe Buttons Download Upload Upload and Create Save Restore Delete Rename
21. 6 4 See also Analog tags Device tags Digital tags Memory tags String tags System tags Home button graphic object 20 7 21 17 21 48 using with alarm objects 9 37 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 using with trends 28 11 Horizontal position animation 20 6 22 12 at run time 17 18 Horizontal slider animation 20 6 22 7 22 14 at run time 17 17 If then else logic in expressions 23 17 nesting 23 18 Image Browser 19 23 Image graphic object 20 2 20 14 Images editor 19 22 Importing alarm files 9 4 E 3 applications 4 6 global object displays H 3 graphic displays 19 4 H 3 tags 7 11 Importing application text 12 13 problems with 12 13 Indicators 21 38 Information acknowledge button graphic object a 20 7 21 17 atrun time 27 7 INFORMATION display 27 6 at run time 17 19 opening and closing 27 7 window size 4 14 Information message display graphic object a 20 10 21 63 at run time 17 19 27 7 Information message files 27 2 27 4 changing the file to use at run time 27 8 Information messages 27 1 creating your own display for 27 7 displaying 27 3 embedded variables in 24 2 multiple languages for 27 5 setting up 27 1 viewing at run time 17 19 Information Messages editor 27 2 Information Setup editor 27 3 Index Ingredients for recipes 29 1 Initial values for tags 6 12 30 1 See also Tag values Input focus giv
22. For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 7 To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polygon tool to reshape lines polygons polylines and rectangles For more information see page 20 45 Creating rectangles and squares To create a rectangle or square 1 Select the Rectangle tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want To draw a square hold down Ctrl while you drag 3 To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box 4 Select rectangle or square options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 20 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE E Rounded rectangle tool 20 20 5 To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polygon tool to reshape the rectangle into a polygon For more information see page 20 45 Creating rounded rectangles and squares Due to a Windows limitation you cannot rotate rounded rectangles and rounded squares To create a rounded rectangle or square 1 Select the Rounded Rectangle tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want To draw a square hold down Ctrl while you drag 3 You can change how rounded the corners are by using the handle that appears inside the rounded rectangle Click the handle and dra
23. If you are comparing data sets or tag sets within a recipe only ingredients with different values are displayed in the report If you are comparing data sets or tag sets between two recipes both common ingredients and unique ingredients are listed in the report To compare recipes 1 Open the RecipePlus Editor 29 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 On the Recipe menu click Compare Recipes Compare Recipes C Compare within a single recipe f Compare across two recipes Recipe 1 C Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents AS view Enterprises MESH ell T Projects BakenAeciperlussOrganic brownies op Recipe 2 CADocuments and Settings 4ll Users Documents AS view Enterprises ESH ell Ps Projects BakenAeciperlus Ornganic cookies pp W Compare Data Sets Data Set 1 Data Set He Small batch F Small batch Compare Tag Sets l Compare Cancel Help 3 Specify the recipe file or files data sets and tag sets to compare For information about the options in the Compare Recipes dialog box see Help 4 Click Compare A report is displayed in Windows Notepad 29 8 29 Setting up RecipePlus P CompareReport txt Notepad ojx File Edit Format View Help Recipe Compare Report 6 6 2005 8 16 24 PM Report Type Data Set Compare Recipe File s Recipel C Documents and Settings All Users Documents RSView Enterprise MeE HMI Projects Bakery RecipePlus organic brownie
24. Name Type String al Sets the name of the object Help For more information about using the Property Panel to set up an object s properties see Help 20 30 20 Using graphic objects Assigning tags and expressions to an object s connections Use the Property Panel s Connections tab to assign tags or expressions to the selected object s connections If multiple objects are selected the tab is blank because you can assign tags or expressions to only one object at a time How values are updated The arrows indicate the direction in which the data flows between the connection and the data source A right arrow indicates that the connection sends values to the data source The connection is a write connection A left arrow indicates that the data source sends values to the connection The connection is a read connection 20 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This box describes the selected 20 32 A double arrow indicates that the data flows in both directions The connection is a read write connection Property Panel Click for help on the MaintanedPushButton2 Maintained Push Bu 4 selected connection Properties Connections Ee y ee HE H remi ee san Value connection and indicates the Type Long Returns the control state value of the object type of data the connection El uses Help The arrows show the direction in which data flows between the connec
25. Problems with displaying values m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the numeric display is filled with asterisks m If the integer portion of the value including the decimal point and minus sign contains more digits than specified for the display the numeric display is filled with asterisks m Ifthe numeric display is sized so that the value cannot be fully displayed the value is truncated and the last displayable digit is replaced with an asterisk m Ifthe value doesn t fit on the first line of the display and there is room for a second line the value continues onto the second line To set up a numeric display 1 Double click the numeric display 21 29 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 30 Numeric Display Properties x General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width a Border uses back color is Back color Raisedinset 8 BB Border color Back style Pattern style C Pattern color Solid None L Fore color l Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial jho B z u eee Cel eee Value settings Number of digits Fill left with Decimal places 5 None fo Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the numeric display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the object s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specif
26. border 28 5 chart 28 6 isolated graphing in 28 8 types 28 7 XY Plot 28 7 coloring 28 9 creating 28 3 linking buttons to 21 9 minimum and maximum values for 28 6 I 19 pens 28 6 icons 28 7 markers 28 7 planning 3 6 plotting values across the chart 28 8 problems at run time 28 12 setting up 28 3 28 4 28 5 specifying number time and date format for a 15 16 testing 28 10 time date and number format 28 3 window 28 5 x horizontal axis 28 6 labels 28 6 y vertical axis 28 6 labels 28 6 Trigger Label Selector 9 5 Trigger values for alarms 9 4 9 11 for information messages 27 5 for local messages 19 28 Troubleshooting See Problems at run time Problems during application development U Unicode text translating 12 9 Units for recipes 29 1 User accounts DEFAULT user 11 4 User groups assigning security codes to 11 9 FactoryTalk Security creating 11 19 Windows adding to RS View 3 20 and earlier applications 11 7 Users assigning login and logout macros to 11 4 assigning security codes to 11 4 11 9 assigning security permissions to 11 18 displaying current user 23 15 Factory Talk Security adding to FactoryTalk View 11 4 creating 11 17 managing accounts 11 21 logging in and out 11 12 17 6 atruntime 17 2 RS View 3 20 and earlier assigning login and logout macros to 11 6 assigning security codes to 11 6 RS View 3 x migrati
27. industries In the pharmaceutical industry you could use recipes to design flexible packaging creating recipes that specify the number of tissues to put in a box or the number of milliliters of shampoo to put in a bottle Summary of steps These are the steps for creating a recipe system 1 In the RecipePlus Setup editor specify the runtime location for recipe files The files can be stored with the application or in a separate location For details see page 29 5 2 Inthe RecipePlus Editor set up ingredients data sets tag sets and units You can also specify a percent complete tag and a status tag for the recipe For details see page 29 6 3 Create a display in the Graphics editor containing a RecipePlus selector table and buttons For details see page 29 9 4 If desired create key buttons in the same graphic display to allow the operator to use the selector and table without a keyboard For information about the buttons you can use with recipes see page 29 11 How the recipe system works A recipe system consists of a recipe file and the graphic objects used to work with the ingredients at run time RecipePlus selector Use the RecipePlus selector to select the recipe file and unit to work with RecipePlus table Use the RecipePlus table to display the selected recipe file s ingredients tag values and data set values The operator can edit data set values in the table unless you select the View only option
28. on PanelView Plus CE terminals 16 3 on PanelView Plus terminals 16 3 on personal computers 15 4 shutting down 15 5 transferring from Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE 16 6 to PanelView 16 1 16 5 to PanelView Plus CE 16 1 16 5 to personal computers 15 1 15 3 Runtime application file creating 14 2 Runtime RAM usage monitoring 8 7 Runtime screen resolution 4 11 Runtime Security editor 11 3 S Sample applications 2 2 Scale graphic object 20 6 21 43 21 47 Index Screen resolution at run time 4 11 Screen size See Window size Security and remote display changes 8 4 automatic logout 11 13 controlling who can stop the application 11 14 FactoryTalk Security 11 1 FactoryTalk View security 11 1 for Application Manager 4 10 logging in and out 11 12 planning 3 7 setting up 11 17 using visibility animation 11 14 11 24 22 9 Security codes assigning to graphic displays 11 9 assigning to RS View 3 20 and earlier users 11 6 assigning to users 11 4 11 9 Security functions in expressions 23 15 using 11 11 11 24 22 9 Serial downloads cable to use for 16 6 Servers data 5 2 See also OPC servers Shutdown button graphic object 20 4 21 17 assigning visibility animation to 11 24 11 25 limiting access to 11 14 locating in display hierarchy 13 1 using to navigate 13 3 13 7 using to shut down application 15 5 using to stop application 14 2 Shutdown
29. see Chapter 23 Setting minimum and maximum values Many types of animation require a minimum and maximum range for the tag or expression These values determine the start and end points for a range of motion For example if you specify a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 100 the object will not react to values outside of this range So even if the expression has a value of 200 the object does not change from its At maximum position When setting up animation select one of these methods for calculating the minimum and maximum values m Use tag s min and max property values select this method to use the minimum and maximum values of the first HMI tag in the expression If more than one HMI tag is used in the expression the first HMI tag s minimum and maximum values are used For analog HMI tags the values are taken from the Minimum and Maximum boxes in the Tags editor For digital tags the minimum is 0 and the maximum is 1 m Use constant select this method to use numeric constants Type the minimum and maximum values in the boxes m Read from tags select this method to read two tags values to determine the Bl minimum and maximum values Type the tag names in the boxes or click the Browse Browse button buttons to open the Tag Browser and select the tags If you use this method the tags are read when the graphic display opens Their values at that time are used for the minimum and maximum values The tags are not r
30. 0 else if tag1 gt tag3 then 2 else 4 Using tag names and tag placeholders A tag name can be included as part of an expression or can stand alone as the entire expression To supply a tag name do one of the following m Type a tag name 23 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE You can type a tag name that does not exist in the tag database When you click OK you are prompted to create the tag You can create it now or write down the name and create it later m Click the Tags button and select a tag from the Tag Browser Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression You can use string tags as operands with the plus arithmetic operator and with the relational operators Using tag placeholders instead of tag names The Graphics editor accepts tag placeholders instead of tag names Placeholders allow you to use the same display with different sets of tags You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run m graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector Use parameter files to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global objec
31. 10 10 INFORMATION display 27 6 Default language 12 2 and alarm triggers 9 5 DEFAULT user 11 4 at runtime 11 3 DeskLock tool 11 2 15 17 Device shortcuts editing at run time 15 6 Device tags 7 5 addressing syntax for 7 5 Diagnostics clear all button graphic object a 20 8 21 17 using with diagnostic lists 10 12 Diagnostics clear button graphic object 20 7 21 17 Index using with diagnostics lists 10 12 DIAGNOSTICS display 10 10 at run time 17 19 opening and closing 10 11 window size 4 14 Diagnostics List 2 5 clearing messages in 2 5 displaying 10 5 moving 2 5 resizing 2 5 showing and hiding 2 7 using to test displays 19 10 Diagnostics list graphic object 20 10 21 62 at run time 10 11 17 19 displaying communication errors in 17 20 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 using buttons with 10 12 Diagnostics List Setup editor 10 9 Diagnostics messages 10 1 audiences for 10 4 creating your own display for 10 11 displaying at run time 10 8 17 19 displaying during application development a 10 4 logging from PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals 10 6 10 8 logging to an ODBC database 10 7 message severity 10 3 ODBC format for D 1 printing at runtime 10 8 setting up at run time 10 10 setting up destinations for 10 6 setting up message routing for 10 6 10 8 viewing log files 10 5 Diagnostics Setup tool 10 6 Diagnostics
32. 2 If you specify an Enter key control delay when the time is up the Enter connection is set to 1 If you don t use the delay the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 the operator cannot send new values to the data source 3 When the Enter connection is set to 1 the Enter key hold time timer begins timing 4 When the Enter key hold time has expired the Enter connection is reset to 0 and the operator can send a new value to the Value connection To set up Enter key handshaking to hold the value for a specific period of time 1 In Timing tab of the object s Properties dialog box specify the Enter key control delay optional and Enter key hold time properties 2 In the Connections tab assign a tag to the Enter connection A digital tag is recommended either an HMI tag or a data server tag You can also use the Property Panel to specify the properties and assign a tag to the Enter connection Holding the value until the data source acknowledges that it has read the value To set up an object s Enter key handshaking so that the value at the Value connection is held until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that it has read the value use two connections the Enter connection and the Enter handshake connection Instead of using an Enter key hold time specify an Enter key handshake time You must also specify the Handshake reset type Y
33. 3 If you use the Convert to new window size option in the Machine Edition Import Wizard check the position of the graphic objects in each display 4 Set up communications and edit tags that don t convert directly For more information see page A 9 5 Set up graphic object features that don t convert directly For more information see page A 12 6 Check each expression you used in PanelBuilder 1400e For more information see page A 13 7 If you are going to use a printer at run time set it up for Ethernet or USB printing Adjust the printer settings on the PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal For information about setting up printers on the terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual This manual is available on the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition CD A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Converting PanelBuilder 1400e application files Follow these steps to convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application file with the extension _pvc to an FactoryTalk View application file with the extension med The original PanelBuilder 1400e application file is not modified by the conversion For information about converting RIO applications see page A 10 Steps to take in PanelBuilder 1400e before you convert the application 1 Delete the Pass Through file assignment FactoryTalk View Studio does not support pass through file transfers 2 Make sure the block transfer file numbers are sequential
34. Bit array tags You can monitor bit arrays for alarm conditions in FactoryTalk View but you can t assign bit arrays to most graphic objects or write to bit arrays The only exception is the piloted control list selector object For this object you can assign a bit array tag to the Visible States connection All bit array tags in your PanelBuilder application are converted to HMI memory tags For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm conditions see Chapter 9 For information about editing HMI tags see Chapter 7 For information about the piloted control list selector see Help B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Converting RIO communications Remote I O RIO communications are not supported for applications that will run on personal computers You can use RIO communications on the PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE runtime platforms Supported PanelBuilder tags are converted to HMI device tags and RSLinx aliases For information about unsupported PanelBuilder tags see below To convert an RIO application from PanelBuilder to FactoryTalk View 1 Convert the application as described on page B 2 2 Open the RSLinx Enterprise data server and then double click Communication Setup 3 Inthe Communication Setup editor add an RIO driver m For PanelView Plus 400 and 600 terminals use the 2711P RN1 driver For all other PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminals use the 2711P R
35. Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Project name RecipePlus Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Project name RecipePlus Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 If recipe files are stored outside the HMI project when you perform an action on a recipe file at run time the file is locked until the action is completed This prevents other users from making changes to a file while you are working with it Storing recipe files with the HMI project If recipe files are part of the HMI project when a recipe file is saved at run time FactoryTalk View updates the mer file with changes to the data sets When you stop the runtime application the changes are retained and are displayed the next time you run the application and display the recipe file You can convert the mer file to an med file to 29 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE view the changes in FactoryTalk View Studio For more information about converting runtime application files see page 14 6 cipePlus J Ae RecipePlus Setup RecipeFlus Editor Recipe file location F RecipePlus Setup Condiments C Recipe files are NOT part of the HMI project PSeeanerisaniSetradneune Seow ad caret Hee _ For details about using the RecipePlus Setup editor see Help Setting up recipe files Use the RecipePlus Editor to set up one or more recipe
36. EDITION USER S GUIDE Browse button 20 28 To open an object s Properties dialog box use one of these methods Double click the object Right click the object and then click Properties Select the object and then on the Edit menu click Properties In the Property Panel with the object selected click the Custom property and then click the Browse button In the Property Panel with the object selected double click the Custom property In the Object Explorer double click the object 20 Using graphic objects Multistate Push Button Properties Click a tab to heneral States Timing Common Connections select it Appearance Border style Border width mo W Border uses back color C Highlight calor Back style Solid i Shape Rectangle State settinge Number of states Next state based on E bi Curent State Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin E E Other W Audio This button is available once you make changes in the dialog box Click itto apply your changes without closing the dialog box When you click a different tab the changes in the current tab are applied automatically You can also use the Property Panel to set up an object s properties as described next For details about setting up a particular object see Help Using the Property Panel Use the Property Panel to modify the properties of graphic objects and assign tags and expressions t
37. EDITION USER S GUIDE Nested if then else You can also nest an if then else structure inside the Then or Else part of an if then else structure Example 1 Nested if then else This expression if statement then value 1 else if statement2 then value2 else value3 has this interpretation Tue state menti false Tue state ment false walled walle D 23 18 23 Using expressions Example 2 Nested if then else This expression if statement then if statement2 then valuel else value2 else value3 has this interpretation Tue state mente _ false walle Using write expressions Write expressions allow the operator to enter a value which is manipulated by an expression before being sent to the data source FactoryTalk View substitutes the value the operator enters for the placeholder in the expression calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection All write expressions must contain a question mark as a placeholder for the value the operator enters You can use write expressions with the numeric input enable button and the numeric input cursor point When the operator presses the button or cursor point a keypad or scratchpad opens The operator enters a value in the keypad or scratchpad and this value is substituted for the placeholder in the write expression 23 19 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 20 Ex
38. EDITION USER S GUIDE Y Bring to Front tool Send to Back tool 20 50 To bring an object to the front 1 Select the object To select an object that s behind another object place your pointer on the front object click once pause and then click again Do not double click and do not move the mouse You can also select a concealed object easily by clicking the object in the Object Explorer 2 On the Arrange menu click Bring to Front or click the Bring to Front tool TZ Select the object from behind Bring the object to front To send an object to the back 1 Select an object 2 On the Arrange menu click Send to Back or click the Send to Back tool lY h Select the object Send the object to back Aligning objects You can align objects or groups of objects with each other and with the grid To align objects 1 Select the objects you want to align 20 Using graphic objects 2 On the Arrange menu click the appropriate menu item or click a tool on the Alignment toolbar This button or menu item Aligns selected objects with the ih Align Left Left most selected object aie Align Center Horizontal center of all selected objects ai Align Right Right most selected object Align Top Top most selected object Re Align Middle Vertical center of all selected objects a Align Bottom Bottom most selected object sta Align Center Points Center of all selected
39. GE Georgian Georgia Default Sort Order Traditional ka GE Georgian Georgia Alternate Sort Order Modern Sort de AT German Austria de DE German Germany Default Sort Order Dictionary de DE German Germany Alternate Sort Order Phone Book Sort DIN de LI German Liechtenstein de LU German Luxembourg de CH German Switzerland el GR Greek Greece gu IN Gujarati India he IL Hebrew Israel hi IN Hindi India hu HU Hungarian Hungary Default Sort Order hu HU Hungarian Hungary Alternate Sort Order Technical Sort is IS Icelandic Iceland id ID Indonesian Indonesia it IT Italian Italy F 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE F 4 RFC1766 Language Country Region Name itCH Italian Switzerland sss s ja JP Japanese Japan Default Sort Order ja JP Japanese Japan Alternate Sort Order Unicode kn IN Kannada India kk KZ Kazakh Kazakhstan kok IN Konkani India sses sS ko KR Korean Korea Default Sort Order ko KR Korean Korea Alternate Sort Order Korean Xwansung Unicode ky KZ Kyrgyz Kazakhstan Iv LV Latvian Latvia It LT Lithuanian Lithuania ms BN Malay Brunei ms MY Malay Malaysia mr IN Marathi India mn MN Mongolian Mongolia nb NO Norwegian Bokml Norway
40. GUIDE 24 2 Where you can create embedded variables You can create embedded variables in these editors Graphics Use this editor to insert embedded variables in the captions for graphic objects For graphic objects with multiple states you can insert different embedded variables in each state s caption You can also use embedded variables in the title bar for On Top displays For information about specific graphic objects see Chapter 21 For information about On Top displays see page 19 13 Local Messages Use this editor to insert embedded variables in local messages For more information about local messages see page 19 25 Information Messages Use this editor to insert embedded variables in information messages For more information about information messages see Chapter 27 Alarm Setup tUse this editor to insert embedded variables in alarm messages For more information about alarms see Chapter 9 Creating embedded variables To create an embedded variable in a graphic object s caption l pA gt 4 gt Open the graphic object s Properties dialog box Click the tab containing the Caption box The Caption box is on the Label tab or the States tab depending on the type of object For text objects use the Text box on the General tab Click Insert Variable Click the type of variable to insert Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help T
41. Local message display object a graphic object that displays local messages when the Value connection assigned to the object matches a message s trigger value m Value connection a tag or expression When the value of this connection matches a message s trigger value the local message display object displays the associated message The local message display object always appears in the graphic display it s placed in whether or not there is a message to display However the operator does not see the message unless the object is located in the display the operator is currently viewing The following example shows how the key parts of the local message system work together Example Displaying local messages This example shows how to notify the operator of the status of a hoist 1 Create a tag called Hoist_Status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to sensors on the hoist The tag has five possible values The tag has this value When the hoist has this status l At bottom 2 Raising 3 Stopped between the top and bottom 4 Lowering 5 At top 19 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 28 2 Inthe Local Messages editor create these messages with trigger values matching the values that will be sent to the Hoist_Status tag Trigger value Message 1 The hoist is ready to rise 2 The hoist is raising the pallet 3 The hoist has stopped 4 The ho
42. Minaa hr WF Din003 bmp W DinO10 bmp W DinO1 F bmp WF Din026 brr Din004 bmp W Din011 bmp Wf Din018 bmp WY Din027 brr W Din005 bmp bind 2 bmp W Din 20 bmp iY Din 28 bre a W oint3bmp Wf Dind21 bmp WF Din029 brr oindtd bmp Wf Din023bmp W Dind30 br File name Files of type Bitmap Images bmp Cancel 2 Inthe Files of type box select the type of image to add 3 Navigate to the directory where the bmp or jpg file is stored and then click the file name Shift click or Ctrl click to select additional files 4 Click Open to add the selected files to the list in the Images folder To view an image that you ve already imported 1 In the Images folder double click the image name or right click it and then click Open 19 Using graphic displays Arrow Down Pumphouse Images Iv Image attributes Type Monochrome Width Height 22 4 22 Using the Image Browser to import images Use the Image Browser to import images as needed while you set up graphic objects In the Image Browser you can m import images into the application m select the image to use on a graphic object m delete images from the application To open the Image Browser use one of these methods I m In an object s Properties dialog box click the Browse button next to the Image box Depending on the type of object the Image box could be located on the General tab Browse button Label tab or States tab For i
43. Restore or Save Display undefined strings using the default language option In the Language Configuration dialog box clear the option s checkbox Tag assigned to the MERuntime RAM Usage Total RAM Usage or Available RAM connection Unassign the tag in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor Tag or expression assigned to the Remote RAM Usage connection Unassign the tag or expression in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor CaptionOnBorder property assigned to graphic object Embedded variable L character assigned to a caption or message Minus sign qualifier used to show right most text assigned to a caption or Message In the Property Panel set the object s CaptionOnBorder property to False Select the Tag radio button in the Numeric Variable or String Variable dialog box for the caption or message Clear the Right most characters in string are displayed checkbox in the String Variable dialog box for the caption or message G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View To remove or replace this feature SHOWSTAR qualifier assigned to a caption or message Embedded variable assigned to the title bar of an On Top display Do this Clear the Show character if string is longer than field width checkbox in the String Variable dialog box for the caption or message Remove the embedded variable RSLinx Enterprise
44. String values using graphic objects to display and enter a 20 9 Structured tags 6 6 using with global object parameters 25 11 See also Backing tags Sybase SQL Server logging to 10 7 Symbol graphic object 20 6 21 40 at run time 17 18 Syntax embedded variable 24 3 System activity See Diagnostics messages System tags 7 1 C 1 alarm reset date and time C 1 for making graphic objects blink C 1 time and date C 2 System time and date C 2 T Tag Browser opening 6 5 using 6 6 Tag Import and Export Wizard 7 11 Tag placeholders 20 39 25 1 creating 20 40 25 3 using in expressions 23 5 using with animation 22 5 Tag sets for recipes 29 1 comparing 29 7 Tag statistics viewing 7 8 Tag substitution 6 11 20 38 Tag syntax for array tags KEPServerEnterprise 9 17 RSLinx Enterprise 9 16 Tag values changing at run time 17 15 displaying at run time 17 17 ensuring the data source has read 21 13 logging 6 12 26 5 using graphic objects to display 20 9 using graphic objects to set 20 4 20 9 using macros to assign 6 12 30 1 Tags 6 1 addressing syntax 7 5 assigning to graphic objects 20 36 using the Property Panel 20 31 viewing in Object Explorer 20 25 basic steps for using 6 2 browsing for 6 5 limits in graphic displays 19 1 off line browsing for 6 7 planning 3 2 using in expressions 23 5 See also Analog tags Array tags Backing tags Data server
45. Text The text object contains a numeric embedded variable that displays the read tag If the original numeric data display object does not contain text manually create a numeric display object with the desired properties in FactoryTalk View Connected Line Polyline B 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Is converted to this FactoryTalk View This PanelBuilder object object Notes Circle Ellipse The ellipse has a circular shape Freeform Freehand Screen List Selector Display list selector Goto Screen Button Goto display button Return Screen Button Return to display button New Password Button Password button Print Alarm List Button Print alarm history button Clear Alarm List Button Clear alarm history button Unsupported graphic objects These PanelBuilder objects are not supported in FactoryTalk View B 6 Print Only Object Circular Scale Scrolling Text Print Alarm Button Horn Silence Button Lamp Horn Test Button Select Operator Button Enable Disable Security Button Verify Password Button The FactoryTalk View Password button opens a dialog box that allows the user to type and verify a new password B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Unsupported settings and controls This section describes PanelBuilder settings and controls that are not used in FactoryTalk View Settings and controls for alarms FactoryTalk View does
46. The graphic libraries are available on the development computer but do not appear at run time To use a library as a graphic display at run time you must add the library into your application s folder of graphic displays If the library doesn t contain strings for languages supported by the current application the undefined strings are displayed with question marks To use a library as a display in your application l 2 J In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Displays icon Click Add Component Into Application In the dialog box navigate to the Libraries folder and then click the gfx file for the library to use The Libraries folder is located in Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 19 Using graphic displays 4 Click Open The library is copied into the Displays folder Using libraries to store displays with multiple languages The maximum number of languages an application can use is 40 during development and 20 at run time Since the libraries are stored outside of the HMI project folder and are available to all applications they do not have this limit However since they are not stored in the HMI project folder you cannot export the strings in library displays for translation Instead export a graphic display for trans
47. The operator can scroll through the control list selector using m key button graphic objects These are graphic objects that duplicate the functions of keyboard keys m the arrow keys and Enter key on a terminal s keypad m the arrow keys and Enter key on a keyboard Using buttons with the control list selector The operator presses the buttons to scroll up or down the list or to make selections from the list The buttons can be set up to work with the control list selector that has input focus or you can link the buttons to a specific control list selector Use this button To do this Backspace Move the cursor back to the highlighted item in the list End Move to the bottom item in the list Enter Select the item the cursor is pointing to Home Move to the top item in the list Move down Move down one item in the list Move up Move up one item in the list Page down Move down one page in the list Page up Move up one page in the list How Enter key handshaking works When the operator selects a state in the control list selector and presses an enter button or Enter key the highlighted state s value is written to the programmable controller or device You can use Enter key handshaking to hold the value of the tag at the programmable controller or device for a specific period of time to ensure the value is read before the control list selector overwrites the value with a new value Enter key hands
48. VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Panel tool Arc tool 20 16 Creating panels Panels support visibility animation only To create a panel 1 Select the Panel tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the panel and then drag to draw a rectangle the general size you want the panel to be 3 To change how the panel looks double click the panel to open the Panel Properties dialog box 4 Select panel options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 5 To close the dialog box click OK Creating arcs and wedges Arcs and wedges are drawn in two steps first you create an ellipse or circle and then you reshape it into the segment you want YY n A Arc Hollow wedge Filled wedge To create an arc or wedge 1 Select the Arc or Wedge tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw an ellipse or circle To base the arc or wedge on a circle rather than an ellipse hold down Ctrl while you drag When you release the mouse button a set of handles appears so you can decrease the angle of the wedge or arc from 360 degrees to the desired angle 5 Ellipse tool 7 20 Using graphic objects Click a handle and drag the mouse to cut out part of the circle To finish drawing click the object To change how the object looks click Properties on the context menu or double click the object to open its Properties dialog b
49. View application and then modify the alarm setup as needed Or you could modify the information in the XML file before importing it For more information about XML see the World Wide Web Consortium s web page about XML at http www w3 org XML Creating alarm XML files by exporting The quickest way to create an XML file for your application s alarm setup is to export the data from FactoryTalk View You can then open the XML file in Notepad make your changes and import the file back into FactoryTalk View The strings for the application s current language are exported to the XML file To export strings for another language reopen the application in the new language and repeat the XML export To export alarm information to an XML file 1 In the Explorer window right click the Alarm Setup editor 2 Click Import and Export E 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For information about using the Alarm Import Export Wizard see Help FactoryTalk View creates a file with the name you specify in the location you specify Editing XML files We recommend that you use Notepad to edit your XML files If you do not want to change a property you don t need to include it in the XML file Saving XML files in Notepad Save XML files created or edited in Notepad using either UTF 8 or UTF 16 file format Notepad s Unicode file typ
50. You can also use the Property Panel to specify the properties and assign tags to the connections Time date and number formats for graphic objects Graphic objects use the time date and number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol floating point values displayed in graphic objects uses a comma for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Setting up buttons Many of the button graphic objects are set up the same way The instructions in this section apply to these buttons Acknowledge alarm Logout Acknowledge all alarms Move down Alarm status mode Move left Backspace Move right Clear alarm banner Move up 21 Setting up graphic objects Clear alarm history Next pen Diagnostics clear Page down Diagnostics clear all Page up Display print Password End Pause Enter RecipePlus Goto configure mode Home Reset alarm status Return to display Information acknowledge Shutdown Language switch Silence alarms Login Sort alarms You can set up any combination of these buttons in a graphic display For example you might want to put a login logout and shutdown button in the same graphic display Create and then set up each button separately The illustration shows the login button Some buttons have different properties on the General tab but you c
51. a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling Identifying the tags and values to monitor To set up information messages determine which tags associated with machine processes to monitor and identify the values for those tags that will trigger information messages For information about creating tags see Chapter 7 21 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 27 4 How information messages work These are the key parts of the information message system m Information message file a text file containing a list of messages with a numeric trigger value for each message Information message display a graphic display that opens at run time and displays information messages m Value connection a tag or expression When the value of this connection matches a message s trigger value the information message display opens with the associated message displayed The following example shows how the key parts of the information message system work together Example Setting up the data source to display information messages This e
52. a plant that cans corn and peas The machinery used in both processes is identical Instead of creating two displays and specifying corn related tags in one display and pea related tags in another you can create one display and not specify any tag names Where a tag name is required type a tag placeholder You can use tag placeholders wherever you would normally assign a tag to an object including in expressions and embedded variables You can also use tag placeholders in the expressions you create to animate objects You can also use tag placeholders with global objects For more information see Chapter 25 You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run 20 39 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 40 m graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector Use parameter files to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global object parameters For more information about using parameter files and global object parameters see Chapter 25 Creating tag placeholders A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the
53. alarm setup file or to modify graphic displays and global displays For information about working with alarm XML files see Appendix E Sometimes editing your display information in an XML file is quicker than working in FactoryTalk View For example if you have a list of 100 local messages to set up for a graphic display you might prefer to enter all the information in a text editor and then import the display information into FactoryTalk View For more information about XML see the World Wide Web Consortium s web page about XML at http www w3 org XML Creating graphics XML files by exporting The quickest way to create an XML file for your application s graphic displays is to export the data from FactoryTalk View You can then open the XML file in Notepad make your changes and import the file back into FactoryTalk View The strings for the application s current language are exported to the XML file To export strings for another language reopen the application in the new language and repeat the XML export To export graphic display information to an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Displays editor or the Global Objects editor 2 Click Import and Export H 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE The Graphics Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For information about using the Graphics Import Export Wizard see Help FactoryTalk View creates XML files
54. an alarm has been triggered to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 for all alarms Silence alarms button Silence the audio indicator for all current alarms on personal computers only Sort alarms button Toggle between sorting alarms in alarm lists and the alarm log file by time and by trigger value Diagnostics clear all button Remove all diagnostics messages from all diagnostic lists 20 Using graphic objects Entering and displaying numeric and string values Use this graphic object Numeric input enable button To do this Enter a numeric value and then write the value to a tag or an expression or ramp a value at the data source For details see page 17 6 Numeric input cursor point Enter a numeric value and then write the value to a tag or an expression or ramp a value at the data source For details see page 17 6 String input enable button Enter a string value and then write the value to a tag For details see page 17 10 Numeric display Display numeric tag values For example display the current temperature of an oven For details see page 21 28 String display Display string tag values For example set up the data source to generate strings that report on the state of a process of operation or that provide the operator with instructions about what to do next For details see page 21 33 RecipePlus button Display data set and tag values for ingredients in t
55. as a red square with an X through it You cannot edit broken reference objects To repair a broken reference object 1 Recreate the base object with the same object type and name as before on the same display as before Using global object parameters Global object parameters are parameters that you can assign to global objects A global object parameter allows you to assign different tags or sets of tags to each reference object without breaking the link to the base object This allows you to make changes to the base object and all the associated reference objects at the same time For example the Logix_PIDE global object display contains a grouped object composed of other grouped objects The objects connections are set up with tags and expressions 25 Using parameters and global objects that use values from a set of Logix5000 tags When you create multiple reference objects from this base object each reference object can use a different set of Logix5000 tags The global object parameters you assign to the base object allow you to do this because you are using a placeholder instead of a specific backing tag a backing tag is a path to a folder of tags it is also known as a structured tag If you then change add or remove a tag or expression in the base object the same change is made to all the reference objects If you don t use global object parameters you can still assign different tags to different reference objects b
56. choose colors that don t appear in the toolbars For example if you want to use a dark blue background color for a button with a light blue background color for its image label you must assign the colors separately Using the toolbar would assign the same color to both properties Also use the Properties dialog box or Property Panel to change the default colors for properties that cannot be assigned using the color toolbars Naming objects Objects and groups of objects are automatically given a name and number when you create them for example NumericInputEnable4 If desired you can assign a more meaningful name to the object for example Conveyor_speed_input Each object in a display must have a unique name The object name appears in the status bar Diagnostics List Property Panel and Object Explorer in FactoryTalk View Studio and in diagnostics log messages at run time To name an object in the Property Panel 1 Select the object 2 In the Property Panel click the Properties tab 3 Double click the Name row and then type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the underscore character _ 20 Using graphic objects To name an object in its Properties dialog box 1 Double click the object to open its Properties dialog box 2 Click the Common tab 3 Inthe Name box type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the unders
57. click the Object Explorer tool m On the View menu click Object Explorer m Right click an object and then click Object Explorer Right click an object to open its context menu Click the icon to view the objects and groups within a group Object Explorer Pane Groupeb Groupi Test5 Lines degrees TextT 0 Text Line 5S Groupes Momenta G real inde Highlight Expand Key Assignments Arrange d Animation d Convert to wallpaper Tag Substitution Property Panel Object Explorer Cut Copy Delete Duplicate Global Object Defaults Edit Base Object Break Link You can keep the Object Explorer open as you work in the Graphics editor For more information about using the Object Explorer see Help Highlighting objects in the Object Explorer You can use the Object Explorer to highlight m specific types of objects m objects that have animation attached 20 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m objects that have a specific tag or expression assigned to them The objects are highlighted in red in the Object Explorer and in the graphic display If your graphic display uses a red background the highlighting is not visible in the graphic display To highlight objects in the Object Explorer 1 In the Object Explorer click Highlighting on and then click Settings Highlight Settings By
58. controls that are not used in FactoryTalk View Controls for transferring runtime application files PanelBuilder 1400e uses these optional controls for transferring files to the runtime terminal m Transfer Inhibit control Transfer Request control Transfer Status control These controls are not necessary in FactoryTalk View because the ME Transfer Utility allows you to transfer the runtime project file while running a project on the runtime terminal Settings and controls for alarms FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder 1400e features and settings to manage alarms m alarm relays m bit alarm acknowledgement Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time The PanelBuilder 1400e Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time will be used for all alarm hold times You can change the hold time in the FactoryTalk View Alarm Setup editor in the Advanced tab m Remote Alarm Control Delay Time In FactoryTalk View if an Ack connection is assigned when an alarm is acknowledged the Ack connection is set immediately without waiting for a delay time FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder 1400e controls to manage alarms m PLC Controlled Relay control m PLC Controlled Audio control m Acknowledge to PLC control if the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option is set to Bit A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Invalid characters in screen names Characters in PanelBuilder 1400e screen names that are not supported in Fact
59. displays the status of all the alarms that are currently active m Past alarms displays the status of all the alarms that have been active since the alarm status has been reset The operator can press the alarm status mode button to cycle through the different modes If desired you can set up the alarm status list to show alarms for specific alarm triggers only FactoryTalk View comes with a library graphic display called STATUS that contains an alarm status list object alarm status mode button and other buttons for working with the list You can use the display and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using alarm status lists see page 9 34 To set up an alarm status list 1 Double click the alarm status list Alarm Status List Properties x General Alarm Common Appearance Border style Border width m v Border uses back color Raisedinset E Oo eale BB Border color E Header back color BB Header fore color Text Font Size Aria dfe Biz ul Other M Key navigation Wrap around Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the alarm status list looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard and how scrolling works for the list m Inthe Alarm tab specify the columns to include in the list the number of lines per alarm
60. editing 20 40 embedded variables in 24 2 exporting to XML H 1 grouping and ungrouping 20 47 importing XML H 3 moving 20 41 naming 20 34 navigating between 21 7 positioning 20 49 with grid 19 8 replacing tags and expressions in 20 38 resizing 20 44 selecting 20 23 setting up 21 1 using the Properties dialog box 20 26 using the Property Panel 20 30 spatial properties of 21 1 time date and number formats 21 16 using at run time 21 3 using keys to work with See Special keys using to display alarms and messages a 20 10 using to display processes 20 6 using to enter and display numeric and string values 20 9 using to illustrate displays 20 2 using to navigate 13 3 using to start and control processes 20 4 visibility setting up 21 1 Grid in graphic displays 19 8 in trends 28 9 Group objects animating 20 47 22 14 creating 20 47 editing 20 48 naming 20 35 using global object parameters with 25 11 H Handshaking Enter key 21 13 for Alarm messages 9 21 for alarms 9 18 remote 9 20 Height animation 20 6 22 13 atrun time 17 18 Historical trends 26 6 28 2 HISTORY display 9 6 editing 9 29 HMI servers 2 8 2 9 4 1 HMI tags 6 2 7 1 addressing syntax for 7 5 browsing for 6 5 creating 7 8 data sources 7 5 exporting 7 11 how to use 6 5 importing 7 9 7 11 merging databases 7 11 naming 7 7 searching for 7 4 when to use
61. evaluated String operands are evaluated by case and by alphabetical order Lower case letters are greater than upper case letters For example h is greater than H Letters later in the alphabet are greater than those earlier in the alphabet For example B is greater than A Logical operators Logical operators determine the validity of one or more statements There are three logical operators AND OR and NOT The operators return a non zero value if the expression is true or a 0 if the expression is false Any statement that evaluates to a non zero value is regarded as true For example the statement tag1 is false if the value of tag is O and true if tag has any other value The logical operators are 23 Using expressions Example For these examples Symbols Operator Action tag 5 and tag2 7 AND amp amp and Returns a 1 if the tagl lt tag2 AND tagl 5 statements to the Both statements are true right and left of the returns a 1 operator are both true OR Il or Returns a 1 ifeither tagl gt tag2 OR tagl 5 the statement to the tagl 5 is true left or right of the returns a 1 operator is true NOT negation Reverses the NOT tagl lt tag2 logical value of the statement it operates on Although tag lt tag2 is true NOT reverses the logical value returns a 0 The parentheses are essential in the above expressions They determine the evaluation order of the operators F
62. files Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple recipe files at the same time The RecipePlus Editor has special items on the Edit menu that allow you to easily copy and paste from the spreadsheet in the Ingredients tab to Microsoft Excel This editor also has items on the Recipe menu for adding deleting and renaming data sets and tag sets and for comparing recipes To help you get started FactoryTalk View creates one data set tag set and unit You can rename them and assign data values and tags to them or delete them and create your own 29 6 a Re cipePlus RecipePlus Setup RecipePlus Editor 29 Setting up RecipePlus For information about comparing recipes see the next section Specify the runtime name status tag and percent complete tag Set up ingredients minimum and maximum values data sets and tag sets Set up units pairs of data sets and tag sets Hol Sauce Condiments RecipePlus Editor Runtime recipe name H ot Sauce Status tag StatusTag P Percent complete tag PercentCompleteT ag 2 Dee e For details about the options in the RecipePlus Editor see Help You can also use the RecipePlus Editor to view the data values that are saved at run time For more information see page 29 13 Comparing recipes You can use the RecipePlus Editor to compare data sets and tags sets within a single recipe or between two recipes
63. in the same position relative to each other You can cut copy and paste groups arrange the group as a single object relative to other objects and apply the same properties to all the members of the group at once You can attach animation to a group and any animation attached to individual objects in the group remains active The group animation generally takes precedence over the animation of individual objects within the group For more information see page 22 14 Deleting a group deletes all individual objects in the group To group objects 1 Select all the objects you want grouped TH 2 On the Arrange menu click Group or on the Graphics toolbar click the Group tool The handles around each object are replaced by a set of handles around the group Group tool E E m m in a m a E E gt a Y 4 Drag the mouse to select the objects Group them To ungroup objects 1 Select the group of objects to ungroup CH 2 On the Arrange menu click Ungroup or on the Graphics toolbar click the Ungroup tool Ungroup tool 20 47 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 48 The handles around the group are replaced with handles around each object E E c a E E E gt E a Select the group Ungroup it Ungrouping deletes any animation attached to the group because the group no longer exists However animation attached to the individual objects that were in the group remains active Editi
64. include all alarms active alarms only or only alarms that have been active since the alarm status was last reset The report can include how many times each alarm was triggered and the accumulated time in alarm To set up a print alarm status button 1 Double click the button Print Alarm Status Button Properties x General Label Print Common Appearance Border style E Back style Shape Rectangle Touch margins Horizontal margin fo Filtering Filtered triggers Other MV Audio Cancel Help Border width 4 Pattern style None Vertical margin D MV Border uses back color WB Back Color BB Border Color L Pattern Color E Highlight color Tl Blink iol In the button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab For details about the options in the tabs see Help In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to filter the alarms to include in the report In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Print tab specify what information to print on the report In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility When you are finished click OK 21 57 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 58 Setting up alarm lists The alarm list graphic object displays a list of alarms from the alarm log file It can show all the alarms in the
65. information message display remains in the language that it originally appeared in New messages are displayed in the new language Changing the message file used at run time Your application can use only one message file at a time Follow this procedure to switch message files To use a different message file l 2 3 4 5 Shut down the application Start FactoryTalk View Studio and open the application In the Information Setup editor specify the new information message file Create the runtime application See Chapter 14 Transfer the runtime application to the runtime platform For information about transferring applications to m apersonal computer see Chapter 15 m aPanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see Chapter 16 6 Run the new application 27 Using information messages 21 9 98 Setting up trends This chapter describes m what trends are m summary of steps for creating a trend graphic object m creating trends and the Trend Object Properties dialog box m the parts of the trend graphic object m the different chart types m choosing colors fonts lines and markers for the trend m testing the trend m using objects from the Trends graphic library m using buttons to control the trend at run time m printing trend data m runtime errors for trends About trends A trend is a visual representation of current or historical tag values The trend provides operators with a way o
66. instructions in the display See page 20 13 Image Place images in your display For more information see page 20 14 Panel Draw rectangles that have borders See page 20 16 Arc Draw an arc a segment of an ellipse or circle s perimeter See page 20 16 Ellipse Draw ellipses and circles See page 20 17 Freehand Draw freehand shapes as you would with a pen on paper See page 20 17 Line Draw straight diagonal horizontal and vertical lines See page 20 18 Polygon Draw a series of connected straight lines forming a closed shape See page 20 18 20 2 20 Using graphic objects Use this graphic object To do this Polyline Draw a series of connected straight lines See page 20 18 Rectangle Draw rectangles and squares See page 20 19 Rounded rectangle Wedge Draw rectangles and squares with rounded corners See page 20 20 Draw a filled segment of an ellipse or circle See page 20 16 20 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Controlling the application Use this graphic object Goto display button To do this Open a graphic display For details see page 13 4 Return to display button Close display button Close a display and return to the previous display For details see page 13 5 Close a display Can also send a value to a tag For details see page 13 6 Display list selector Select a display to open from a list of displays For details see page 13 6 Display
67. m Inthe Value box type 80 For foreground and background colors click Blink Yellow Gra Foreground Solid f Blink Background Solid Blink m For the foreground colors select gray for the first color and yellow for the second color Repeat for the background colors Set up the color for the second warning m In the list box click C m Inthe Value box type 95 m For the foreground and background colors click Blink 22 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 12 Red Gray Foreground C Solid f Blink Background Solid Bink m For the foreground colors select gray for the first color and red for the second color Repeat for the background colors 6 Click Apply Setting up fill animation With fill animation the level of fill in an object is based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be half full Fill animation is available for all drawing objects including group objects except images and panels If you select the Inside Only check box fill animation does not affect objects borders line objects or objects with transparent backgrounds For more information about setting up fill animation see Help Setting up horizontal position animation With horizontal position animation an ob
68. macro 30 2 30 4 Siemens devices 5 1 Silence alarms button graphic object 9 9 20 8 21 17 using with alarm objects 9 37 Single sign on 11 22 SLC tags importing 7 9 l 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE I 18 Sort alarms button graphic object 9 9 20 8 21 17 using with alarm lists 9 37 Special keys arrows using with graphic objects 20 45 Ctrl copying objects with 20 42 drawing objects with 20 17 20 18 20 19 20 20 resizing objects with 20 45 rotating objects with 20 56 selecting objects with 20 24 Shift using with graphic objects 20 41 20 45 using to navigate at run time 21 8 using with numeric pop up windows 17 8 using with string pop up windows 17 13 Spreadsheets working in 2 12 Square graphic object 20 3 20 19 Standard toolbar 2 5 Startup macro 30 2 30 4 Startup settings 14 1 States multistate graphic objects 20 1 States toolbar 20 35 Status bar 2 6 showing and hiding 2 7 STATUS display 9 6 copying 9 30 editing 9 28 String display graphic object 20 9 21 33 atrun time 17 17 String embedded variables 24 4 atruntime 24 8 String input enable button graphic object a 20 9 21 34 at run time 17 10 17 16 how values are written 17 14 navigating to 21 7 using Enter key handshaking with 21 13 String pop up character input using at run time 17 11 String pop up windows using at run time 17 11 17 13 String tags 7 1
69. moves to the current latest data in the trend To see how the buttons work with the trend open the Trends graphic library see page 28 10 and start test mode For information about creating buttons see Chapter 20 For details about setting up the buttons see page 21 16 Printing trend data To print trend data at run time provide the operator with a method for printing the graphic display You can use these methods to print graphic displays at run time m Create a display print button For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 m Assign a tag or expression to the Remote Display Print connection in the Global Connections editor When the value of the tag or expression changes from 0 to a non zero value the current display is automatically printed Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want the data printed For more information about setting up remote display printing see Chapter 8 Everything on the screen is printed including the current display pop up windows and any visible background applications For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for applications that will run on a personal computer see page 15 10 For information about specifying printer options for applications that will run on a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Improving clarity of the trend printout Depending on what t
70. nn NO Norwegian Nynorsk Norway pl PL Polish Poland pt BR Portuguese Brazil pt PT Portuguese Portugal pa IN Punjabi India ro RO Romanian Romania ru RU Russian Russia sa IN Sanskrit India sr SP Cyrl Serbian Cyrillic Serbia sr SP Latn Serbian Latin Serbia sk SK Slovak Slovakia sl SI Slovenian Slovenia es AR Spanish Argentina es BO Spanish Bolivia es CL Spanish Chile eseseses s s F e RFC1766 names RFC1766 Language Country Region Name es CO Spanish Colombia es CR Spanish Costa Rica es DO Spanish Dominican Republic es EC Spanish Ecuador es SV Spanish El Salvador es GT Spanish Guatemala es HN Spanish Honduras es MX Spanish Mexico es NI Spanish Nicaragua es PA Spanish Panama es PY Spanish Paraguay es PE Spanish Peru es PR Spanish Puerto Rico es ES Spanish Spain Default Sort Order International es ES Spanish Spain Alternate Sort Order Traditional es UY Spanish Uruguay es VE Spanish Venezuela sw KE Swahili Kenya sv FI Swedish Finland sv SE Swedish Sweden syr S Y Syriac Syria ta IN Tamil India tt RU Tatar Russia te IN Telugu India th TH Thai Thailand tr TR Turkish Turkey uk UA Ukrainian Ukraine ur PK Urd
71. object represents numeric values using a needle on a dial At run time the gauge indicates the value of a tag or expression in relation to the gauge s minimum and maximum values To set up a gauge 1 Double click the gauge Gauge Properties Es General Display Common Connections Appearance Back style C Back color E Fill color Line style Line width Heads cate Soia E BB Fore color Sweep style Needle width Point Major ticks Minor ticks 3 1 X Font Size Arial fio B z u Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the gauge looks like at run time In the Display tab specify how the gauge displays values at run time In the Common tab specify the gauge s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the gauge receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 46 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up scales Use the scale graphic object to show the possible range of values for a bar graph To place value labels on the scale to create a legend use text objects Create the text objects and then position them next to the tick marks on the scale Group all the objects with the bar
72. object that is closest to the top left corner of the display is selected The operator can use these keys to move to and select a different object Use this key To do this Tab Move from the upper left to the lower right Shift Tab Move from the lower right to the upper left Ctrl arrow key Move left right up or down Removing objects from and adding objects to the tab sequence By default you can use the keys to navigate to all lists alarm banners numeric input cursor points trends and ActiveX input objects in a display However you can turn off key navigation for these objects if desired When an object s key navigation is turned off the operator can still select the object using a mouse or touch screen if available By default key navigation is turned off for the numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons You can turn on keyboard navigation if you want the operator to use the keyboard to navigate to these objects 21 Setting up graphic objects To turn key navigation on or off use one of these methods m Inthe Properties tab of the Property Panel set the KeyNavigation property to False for off or True for on m For list objects alarm banners numeric input cursor points numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons in the General tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Key navigation box for off Check the box for on m For ActiveX and trend objects in
73. object type By animation type Alarm Banner Eolo a anmnnnninininiinninininined J larm List Fill J la Status List Height Alarm Status Mode Horizontal Position Are Horizontal Slider To clear all the check boxes LIB ac pace he EInosey i _ Bar Graph QWertical Position right click the list and then Aiea Vertical Slider click Clear All Clear Alarm Banner visibility Clear Alarm History width To select all the check ee r Close Display boxes right click the list and fy Control List Selector Clear All then click Select All ey orosce cic Select 4 Display List Selector P 1Cienlan Print x 20 26 r er Cancel Help For details about the options in the Highlight Settings dialog box see Help Using the Properties dialog box Every graphic object has a Properties dialog box that you can use to set up the object Depending on how the vendor implemented the object third party ActiveX objects might have a Properties dialog box as well 20 Using graphic objects The Properties dialog box contains tabs that you can use to set up the object s properties and connections In this tab General Do this Set up the object s appearance audio indicator and touch margins for buttons and settings that are unique to the object such as the button action for a push button whether to use key navigation to select the object or whether to link a button to a specific object For information about touch m
74. objects th Align to Grid Grid To automatically align objects to the grid as you create or move them 1 On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 20 51 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 52 Examples Aligning objects left right and center ss E _ su a Select objects da _ b d z Select objects EE u la y w Select objects u lt k d e n Align right a s ws Align center 20 Using graphic objects Examples Aligning objects top middle and bottom Align top Align middle Align bottom Spacing objects With Space Vertical and Space Horizontal objects or groups of objects are moved vertically or horizontally to have the same amount of space from the center point of each object To space objects 1 Select the objects you want to space ani 2 On the Arrange menu click a Space menu item or click a tool on the Graphics aos toolbar Space Horizontal tool This tool or menu item Does this Space Horizontal Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart Space Vertical tool horizontally Space Vertical Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart vertically 20 53 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE ww Flip Vertic
75. on planning security and navigation before you begin creating displays Browse through the sample applications for design ideas Map out a display hierarchy Then create a graphic display to use as a template The time you spend planning your displays will make your application easy to use and will save you time in the long run For information about See Planning your displays and creating a template Chapter 3 Setting up application security to control access to displays Chapter 11 Setting up display navigation and creating a display hierarchy Chapter 13 Setting up how objects are used at run time Chapter 21 Using the Graphics editor The Graphics editor opens when you create or open a graphic display global object display or graphic library Each display is stored in the Displays folder You can open and work on multiple graphic displays at the same time ri New Display tool E Save tool 19 Using graphic displays Creating and opening graphic displays To create a graphic display l In the Graphics folder do one of the following m right click Displays and then click New m click the New Display tool m drag and drop the Displays icon into the workspace On the Edit menu click Display Settings to open the Display Settings dialog box and specify settings for the display For more information see page 19 11 Create the objects you want to put in the display For information about creating grap
76. or you can use a new tag name Tag placeholders allow you to create displays that can be used with different tags You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run m graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector Use parameter files to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global object parameters For more information about using parameter files and global object parameters see Chapter 25 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 To create a tag placeholder 1 Inthe Expression box type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 22 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Using expressions Many types of animation can be achieved using expressions You can use expressions containing tag values constants mathematical equations security functions and if then else logic A tag name or tag placeholder can be included as part of an expression or it can stand alone as the entire expression For more information about expressions
77. result of the expression to the Conveyor_speed tag at the data source 9A Using embedded variables This chapter describes m the types of embedded variables m where you can create embedded variables m creating embedded variables m embedded variable syntax m how embedded variables are updated at run time m how embedded variables are displayed at run time About embedded variables Embedded variables allow you to display values that change dynamically at run time You can use embedded variables in the text captions on graphic objects in the title bar of On Top displays and in message text You can use multiple embedded variables in the same caption or message For example you could embed a tag value and the time variable in a local message At run time when the local message is displayed it is updated to reflect the tag s current value as the value changes The time is also updated as the time changes You can also use literal strings and constants in embedded variables or a combination of both variable and literal strings and numbers Embedded variables can consist of m numeric analog or digital tags including both HMI and data server tags m literal numbers constants m string tags including both HMI and data server tags m literal strings static text m tag placeholders For information about tag placeholders see page 20 39 m the time m the date 24 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S
78. status list 9 40 rotation 22 13 expressions in 23 5 vertical position 22 13 filtering 9 5 vertical slider 22 14 handshaking 9 18 visibility 22 8 for remote acknowledgements 9 20 width 22 13 importing and exporting 9 4 19 4 Application Explorer 2 4 2 5 keeping a permanent record of 9 6 9 10 showing and hiding 2 7 notification methods for 9 5 using 2 8 planning 3 5 Application files printing 9 10 converting from runtime to development queueing 9 18 a 14 3 14 6 deleting from disk 18 4 viewing location of 4 18 Application Manager 4 10 converting mer files to med files 14 6 security for 4 10 Application properties viewing 4 18 Application text exporting for translation 12 6 importing 12 13 translating in Excel 12 9 translating in Unicode 12 9 Applications 2 1 18 1 backing up and restoring 4 10 closing 4 10 comparing 16 7 converting PanelBuilder B 1 PanelBuilder 1400e A 1 PanelBuilder 32 B 1 copying deleting and renaming 4 10 creating 4 4 importing PanelBuilder B 1 PanelBuilder 1400e A 1 PanelBuilder 32 B 1 multiple version support for 4 10 G 1 opening 4 7 multiple 4 9 problems with 4 9 planning 3 1 runtime creating 14 2 sample granting users access to 2 2 sample opening 2 2 security for 11 18 11 19 11 20 specifying language for 4 5 A 4 B 3 testing on the development computer 14 2 transferring from PanelVie
79. tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 You can assign tag placeholders in m the Connections tab of an object s Properties dialog box m the Connections tab of the Property Panel m the Expression box in the Animation dialog box m anywhere that you can insert an embedded variable For information about embedded variables see Chapter 24 To create a tag placeholder 1 Type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Performing basic operations on objects Once you have drawn an object you can select the object and work with it You can m move objects m copy objects m duplicate objects m resize objects m reshape drawing objects m delete objects 20 Using graphic objects Moving objects You can move objects using the mouse or the keyboard The keys give you fine positioning allowing you to move objects in small increments You can also use the grid to position objects precisely Another option is to position an object using the object s Top and Left properties in the Property Panel For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also specify an object s position using the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box For more information see page page 21 1 Once you ve moved objects into position you might want to align other objects with them or loc
80. the Common tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Key navigation box for off Check the box for on Linking buttons to objects Some FactoryTalk View buttons can be linked to specific trend list recipe and alarm banner objects or you can set them up to work with whichever object has focus in the display If you are creating small graphic displays that don t have much room you might prefer to use one set of buttons to work with all the graphic objects that accept input focus in the display By default the buttons are set up to work with whichever object has input focus is selected in the display 21 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 10 This trend object has focus Tank oulput Display Tank Ouput Control System Activity bonda September 02 20 MLE tag Tank2_output has no pig he tag Tank _output has no x The item Tank output does k PaTho item Tank output doss 7 yProblern writing value 2 to nt 2 ar 52 PM Details Tank Tank Dock These move up and move down buttons work with the object that has focus However if space isn t a concern you can create multiple copies of the buttons you want to use and link them to specific objects One benefit of linking a button to a specific object is that the operator doesn t have to select the object before pressing the button Another benefit is that you can position the buttons cl
81. the definition assigned to the object takes precedence Using global object parameters with group objects To use global object parameters with a group object the parameters are defined at the group level not at the level of individual objects Thus the definition applies to each object within the group You can assign as many parameters as desired to the group For example you might assign 1 to some members of the group and 2 to other members of the group If you create a global object parameter definition for an object and later group the object the definition is deleted In addition if you create a global object parameter definition for a group and then ungroup the object the definition is deleted Values are assigned to the global object parameters at the group level as well You cannot assign separate values to individual objects in the group 25 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Summary of steps Follow these steps to use global object parameters 1 In the global object display assign placeholders and parameter definitions to the base object For details see the next section 2 Inthe standard graphic display select the reference object and specify the value to use for each parameter For more information see page 25 12 To specify global object parameters for the base object l Create placeholders in each place where you want to use a global object parameter You can create the placeholders an
82. the following m Inthe Objects toolbox click the Trend tool m On the Objects menu select Trending and then click Trend 3 Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the trend 4 Double click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box 5 Set up the trend For details see Help Once you have set up the trend you can edit it as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For more information about graphic objects see Chapter 20 28 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Setting up trends When you double click a trend object the Trend Object Properties dialog box opens Use the dialog box to set up the trend Set up the chart style and update mode Set up how the trend works at run time Set up pens Set up the horizontal axis Set up the vertical axis Set up focus highlight and keyboard navigation Set up the tags to display data for Trend Object Properties General Display Pens AMIE PANE Common Connections Chart style f Standard C xr Plot PT Chart update mode f Automatic Refresh Aate second s t On Change El Cancel Help For details about the options in the Trend Object Properties dialog box see Help 28 4 28 Setting up trends The par
83. the left side of the equal sign For more information about expression syntax see Chapter 23 30 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Using the Macros editor Use the Macros editor to create macros Blend recipe Pumphouse Macros Form lt Tag gt lt Expression gt a blend percent ese 80 For details about using the Macros editor see Help When to use macros You can assign macros to run when m the application starts or shuts down m a graphic display opens or closes m auser logs in or out Macros can be assigned to individual users and to groups of users m a Specified tag or expression changes to a new non zero value using global connections m an operator presses a macro button At run time when the macro runs the values are sent to the tags at the data source At run time the tag assignments are executed asynchronously That is the system does not wait for the completion of one tag assignment before executing the next Therefore do not rely on the order of assignments to control your process 30 2 30 Using macros Running macros when tags or expressions change value You can use global connections to run macros when tags or expressions change value This means you can use the data source to trigger the macro to run FactoryTalk View allows you to create up to five macros for use with global connections The macros must be named Macrol Macro2 M
84. the object horizontally using a mouse the pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag If the tag value is changed externally the position of the slider changes as well 22 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 14 An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation Horizontal slider animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up horizontal slider animation see Help Tips Here are some tips for creating slider objects m The Sliders graphic library contains several slider objects you can drag and drop into your graphic displays Attach slider animation to the button portion of the slider object m If you create your own slider object it s useful to draw an object for example a line to represent the path the slider will move along Setting up vertical slider animation With vertical slider animation you can use a drawing object to set the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object At run time when the operator moves the object vertically using a mouse the pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag If the tag value is changed externally the position of the slider changes as well An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation Vertical slider animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panel
85. the result of an expression You can specify up to 16 color changes A to P for any object Colors can be solid or blinking For each color change specify the value or threshold at which the color is to change and specify the colors to change to At run time when the value reaches or crosses the threshold the color changes 22 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 10 Color animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up color animation see Help Example 1 Creating a text object that blinks This example describes how to create a text object that constantly blinks between two colors Since the blinking is not based on changes in tag values the expression is simply a constant value that matches the value for the selected threshold For details about creating text see page 20 13 1 Select the text object 2 Open the Animation dialog box and then click the Color tab 3 Inthe Expression box type 0 Zero is the default value for threshold A 4 In the list box click threshold A Leave the value in the Value box as 0 5 For the foreground color click Blink If desired click Blink for the background color too 6 For each color click the color box and then click the color to use 7 Click Apply Example 2 Creating an object that changes color as the fill level changes This example describes how to create a rectangle object that chan
86. these objects the operator can still provide input to other objects in the graphic display If the graphic display is closed while Enter key handshaking is in effect the handshaking is cancelled Methods of Enter key handshaking Enter key handshaking works by setting the object s Enter connection to 1 As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 new values cannot be sent to the Value connection How the Enter connection is reset to 0 depends on how you set up Enter key handshaking There are two ways you can use Enter key handshaking m to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time m to hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the value has been read Choose the method that best suits your application needs and communication system 21 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 14 Holding the value for a specific period of time To set up an object s Enter key handshaking so that the value at the Value connection is held for a specific period of time assign a tag to the Enter connection and specify the Enter key hold time You can also specify an Enter key control delay if desired How handshaking works This method of Enter key handshaking works as follows 1 When the operator presses the Enter button the value is sent to the Value connection and the Enter key control delay timer begins timing The use of a delay is optional
87. time trends See Current trends Recipe files setting up 29 6 specifying location for 29 5 RecipePlus 29 1 RecipePlus button graphic object 20 9 21 17 29 3 creating 29 9 using at runtime 17 16 17 18 29 12 RecipePlus Editor 29 6 29 7 viewing runtime data in 29 13 RecipePlus selector graphic object 20 9 29 2 creating 29 9 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 using at runtime 17 16 17 18 29 12 RecipePlus Setup editor 29 5 RecipePlus table graphic object 20 9 29 2 creating 29 9 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 using at runtime 17 16 17 18 29 12 Recipes 29 1 comparing 29 7 deleting units 29 3 displaying at runtime 29 2 downloading 29 3 editing at runtime 29 2 linking buttons to 29 11 number format 29 4 numeric limits 29 4 planning 3 6 printing 29 9 renaming units 29 3 saving atruntime 29 3 selecting at runtime 29 2 setting up 29 2 testing 29 10 time and date formats 29 9 uploading 29 3 viewing data for 14 6 29 13 Rectangle graphic object 20 3 20 19 blinking 22 10 Reference objects assigning global object parameters to 25 11 25 12 creating 25 8 editing 25 9 link properties 25 9 Relational operators in expressions 23 8 evaluation order of 23 11 Remote display changes 8 4 11 23 Remote macros 8 6 30 3 Replace displays 19 12 sizing 4 13 Reset alarm status button g
88. to test mode When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing Test mode is not the same as running the display It does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Alarm and information messages are not displayed although if communications are set up tag values are read and written Display navigation data logging parameters and macros do not work in this mode If you want to test these features test the application as described on page 14 2 If you set up local messages and graphic objects to use multiple languages the messages and objects are displayed in the current application language during test mode Using the Diagnostics List when in test mode The Diagnostics List shows messages about system activities when you test your graphic displays You can specify the types of messages to display in the Diagnostics List move the list resize it and clear the messages in it IP Test Display tool ma Edit Display tool 19 Using graphic displays For information about using the Diagnostics List see page 2 5 For information about specifying the types of messages to show in the Diagnostics List see page 10 4 To use test mode m On the View menu click Test Display or click the Test Display tool To return to edit mode m On the View menu click Edit Display or click the Edit Display tool Setting up graphic displays To set up a graphic d
89. up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 m Inthe Common tab specify the control list selector s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the control list selector exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 21 49 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 50 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up piloted control list selectors Piloted control list selectors allow an operator or remote device to scroll through a list of states for a process and select one of the states A highlight in the list shows the current state Choosing between piloted control list selectors and control list selectors Piloted control list selectors include the following features that control list selectors do not m The states can be selected either by an operator or remotely for example by a programmable controller or by both an operator and a remote device Individual states can be turned off to prevent them from being selected by either the operator or the remote device Control list selectors do not allow states to be turned off m The state values of all of the items that are visible in the list can be written to the Visible States connection when the list scrolls The Visible Sta
90. using these types of files in your displays see page 20 20 Bitmap images that come with FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk View Studio comes with sets of bitmaps that are useful for illustrating graphic objects and displays m arrows m DIN symbols m ISA symbols 19 20 19 Using graphic displays m keyboard button symbols such as Enter and Page Up m parts such as buttons conveyors pipes tanks and valves The symbols and most of the arrows are monochrome that is use only two colors one for the foreground and one for the background You can set up the foreground and background colors for the monochrome images that you use for your objects For color images including JPEG images you can specify whether to use a transparent or solid background If you select the transparent background style the black portions of the image become transparent For detailed information about setting up objects see Help Location of bitmap files The bitmap files that come with FactoryTalk View Studio are stored in this directory Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise Images Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Images Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 The images are in folders called Arrows DIN ISA ListKey and Parts Importing bitmap and JPEG images To use bitmap and JPEG images you can m import the images first and then place them in y
91. using with message files 19 25 Local message files 19 26 19 27 Local messages 19 25 embedded variables in 24 2 multiple languages for 19 29 viewing at runtime 17 19 Local Messages editor 19 26 Localizing applications importing text 12 13 information for translators 12 9 new line character 12 12 problems importing text 12 13 Unicode file schema 12 11 Log files ODBC format for diagnostics messages D 1 LOGIC 5 See WINtelligent LOGIC 5 tags Logical operators in expressions 23 8 evaluation order of 23 11 Login button graphic object 20 4 21 17 locating in display hierarchy 13 1 logging in with 11 12 Login macro 30 2 30 4 assigning to RS View 3 20 and earlier users 11 6 assigning to users 11 4 running 17 3 17 6 Login window 17 2 Logix5000 faceplates See Process faceplates Logix5000 processors 6 2 addressing syntax for 7 6 creating tags in 6 3 Logout button graphic object 20 4 21 16 locating in display hierarchy 13 1 logging out with 11 12 Logout macro 30 2 30 4 assigning to RS View 3 20 and earlier users 11 6 assigning to users 11 4 running 17 3 17 6 LSBit trigger type 9 13 Macro button graphic object 21 54 using to run macros 30 2 Macros creating 30 1 remote running from the data source 8 6 30 3 Macros editor 6 12 Maintained push button graphic object 20 4 21 21 23 20 at run time 17 16 Math functions in expressio
92. which tags to log data for as well as how and where the data is logged You can set up multiple data log models but you can run only one data log model at a time For information about running a different data log model see page 26 5 26 Setting up data logging Creating Data Log Models Use the Data Log Models editor to create one or more data log models Each data log model is a file stored in the editor s folder you can open and work on multiple models at the same time i Blend inputs Pumphouse Data Log Models Mil x Set up general aspects Sete Paths Log Triggers Tags in Model of the model Model name Bland inputs Specify where to log Description the data Maximum data points Specify how logging occurs Specify which tags to log data for Bo For detailed information about the options in the Data Log Models editor see Help Each data log model has a unique name and an optional description You can log a maximum of 300 000 points When the maximum number of data points have been logged the oldest data is deleted to make room for the new data Data storage locations You can store data log files in any one of these locations m on the runtime computer 26 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 26 4 m on another computer on the network m onacompact Flash Card for PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals only If the logging destination is unavail
93. without gaps If necessary renumber the block transfer file numbers so there are no missing numbers Tag addresses in the application will change automatically to match the new number 3 Save the application You can convert the PanelBuilder 1400e application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio or once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open To convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio 1 Open FactoryTalk View Studio New Open Machine Edition Application New Existing Application name Description Language A 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 Inthe New tab in the Application name box type a name for your converted application up to 32 characters long 3 If desired type a description of the application If the PanelBuilder 1400e application contains an Application File Comment the Application File Comment will overwrite the description you type here You can add or change the description later as described on page 4 17 4 Specify a language for the converted application For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 5 Click Import Machine Edition Import Wizard Import Type Select the import type Panel iew Terminal pa ASview Machine Edition Project med ome He 6 Follow the steps in the Machine Edition Import Wizard For details about the options in the Machine Edition Impor
94. 0 0010 tagl lt lt 1 Returns 10 binary 0000 0000 0000 1010 tagl Returns 6 binary 1111 1111 1111 1010 Evaluation order of operators Expressions with more than one operator are evaluated in this order m Operators in parentheses are evaluated first Therefore to change the order of precedence use parentheses m The operator with the highest precedence is evaluated next m When two operators have equal precedence they are evaluated from left to right 23 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Operators are evaluated in this order Evaluation order Symbols 23 12 1 highest 2 NOT x MOD KK AND amp amp gt gt lt lt OR Il 5 lowest EQ NE lt gt LT lt GT gt LE lt GE gt Examples Evaluation order For these examples tagl 5 tag2 7 and tag3 10 tagl gt tag2 AND tag1 lt tag3 is evaluated in this sequence l tagl gt tag2 0 2 tagl lt tag3 1 3 OAND 1 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false tagl gt tag2 AND tag3 is evaluated in this sequence 1 tag2 AND tag3 1 2 tagl gt 1l 1 The expression evaluates to 1 true NOT tag AND tag2 gt tag3 2 is evaluated in this sequence 1 NOT tagl 0 2 0 AND tag2 0 3 tag3 2 100 4 0 gt 100 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false 23 Using expressions 23 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION US
95. 00e and FactoryTalk View but have different names in the two products This PanelBuilder 1400e object Is converted to this FactoryTalk View object Notes Increment Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to increment Decrement Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to decrement Increment Value Button with Display Ramp button and numeric display The Increment Value Button with Display is divided into two separate FactoryTalk View objects Decrement Value Button with Display Ramp button and numeric display The Decrement Value Button with Display is divided into two separate FactoryTalk View objects ASCII Input small and large String input enable button Numeric Entry Keypad small and large Numeric input enable button Screen List Selector s list Display list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Screen List Selector is divided into four separate FactoryTalk View graphic objects Screen List Selector s Enter Key Enter button A 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This PanelBuilder 1400e object Screen List Selector s Down Cursor Is converted to this FactoryTalk View object Move down button Screen List Selector s Up Cursor Move up button Notes Control List Selector s list Control list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Control List Selector is divided into four separate Fa
96. 1 03 05 1 03 29 1 03 53 10417 Fii Notice that in this illustration each pen uses its own scale If desired you can use the same scale for all pens With isolated graphing a grid line is automatically placed above each pen s band Plotting a value across the full width of the chart Use horizontal lines to provide a frame of reference for your tag data For example if you define values that are the limits within which a tag must operate and display horizontal lines in your trend to indicate the limits when a tag crosses one of these limits the tag s alarm condition is obvious on the trend There are two ways to plot a value across the full width of the chart m Inthe Connections tab assign a constant value to a pen 28 Setting up trends When values for the pen have been plotted across the full width of the chart the pen appears as a solid line m Inthe Connections tab assign to a pen the tag expression or constant whose value will be used to determine the position of the line and then in the Pens tab choose the pen type Full Width As soon as the trend is displayed the pen appears as a horizontal line across the full width of the chart Its vertical position is determined by the tag expression or constant s value If the value changes the position changes Choosing trend colors fonts lines and markers The following table summarizes where in the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify colors fonts
97. 1 35 For information about setting up display list selectors see page 21 37 4 Ifthe startup display uses tag placeholders in the Startup editor specify the parameter file to use with the startup display For information about the Startup editor see Chapter 14 25 Using parameters and global objects Creating tag placeholders A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 You can create tag placeholders in m the Connections tab of an object s Properties dialog box m the Connections tab of the Property Panel m the Expression box in the Animation dialog box m anywhere that you can insert an embedded variable For information about embedded variables see Chapter 24 To create a tag placeholder 1 Type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Creating parameter files The parameter file specifies which tags to substitute for the placeholders in the display by assigning one tag to each unique placeholder in the display Create a parameter file for each set of tags that you want to use with the same graphic display At run time the tag values that are displayed depend on which parameter f
98. 25 6 The Canning Overview display looks like this when the operator selects the Peas state Canning Overview Peas Weight Main menu Using global objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When you update the original object the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object You create global objects in global object displays in the Global Objects folder of the Explorer window The objects you create in a global object display are called base objects You can copy or drag base objects into standard graphic displays The copied object is called a reference object You can copy a global object into any number of graphic displays and multiple times into the same graphic display Global object displays have the file extension ggfx They are stored in this default location Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Global Objects Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Global Objects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Fi Save tool 25 Using parameters and global objects where Application Name is the name of your application Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up global objects 1 In the Graphics editor create a global object display For mor
99. A you can add the component into Application B again using the same steps as described above Using Add Component Into Application with graphic displays graphic libraries and global object displays The Add Component Into Application menu command is also useful for m adding graphic displays to your application s Libraries folder m using libraries as graphic displays in your application m moving libraries into the Displays folder so you can export their strings for translation m creating global object displays For information about graphic libraries see page 19 14 For information about global object displays see page 25 7 Deleting components Deleting a component deletes it from the Explorer window and from the hard disk To delete a component 1 Right click the component and then click Delete Removing components You can remove a component from the Explorer window but leave it on the hard disk in case you want to use the component in another application To remove a component 1 Right click the component and then click Remove Renaming components To rename a component 1 Right click the component and then click Rename 18 Working with components Rename From new To Pump Room Cancel 2 Inthe To box type the new name 3 Click OK Duplicating components The Duplicate option is useful for creating multiple similar components For example you could create a graphic display to use a
100. Alarm list graphic object with Use alarm colors turned off for one or more alarm conditions For all alarm conditions that you are displaying clear the Blink check box For all alarm conditions that you are displaying select the Use alarm colors check box Alarm list graphic object with the Acknowledged symbol column turned off G 4 Select the Display column check box for the Acknowledged symbol column G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View To remove or replace this feature Change the Acknowledged symbol to Alarm list graphic object with an Acknowledged symbol other than Do this Alarm list graphic object with the Active symbol column displayed Clear the Display column check box for the Active symbol column Alarm list graphic object with tags or expressions assigned to one or more connections Clear the tags or expressions assigned to the connections Alarm list graphic object with Selected alarm indicator set to Cursor Change the Selected alarm indicator to Highlight bar Alarm list graphic object with Lines per alarm set to gt 1 Change the Lines per alarm to 1 Alarm banner graphic object with Use alarm colors selected Clear the Use alarm colors check box Alarm status list graphic object with Use alarm colors selected Clear the Use alarm colors check box Alarm status list graphic object with Lines per alarm set to gt 1 Change
101. DITION USER S GUIDE 21 12 Repeating a button s action by holding down the button To repeat a button s action by pressing and holding it set up auto repeat for the button If you set up auto repeat when the operator presses and holds down the button repeated button presses are registered until the operator releases the button A button press occurs when the operator clicks an object with the mouse presses it on a touch screen or presses the function key associated with the object Auto repeat works with all these methods of pressing buttons You can use auto repeat with these buttons For this button Each button press does this Multistate push Sends the value for the next state to the data source External changes to the Value connection are not recognized when the button is in auto repeat mode Ramp Sends the new ramped value to the data source External changes to the Value connection are not recognized when the button is in auto repeat mode Move up Moves the highlight up an item in the list recipe selector or recipe table scrolls up in the trend or ramps the numeric input cursor point or numeric input enable button value Move down Moves the highlight down an item in the list recipe selector or recipe table scrolls down in the trend or ramps the numeric input cursor point or numeric input enable button value Page up Moves the highlight up a page in the list recipe selector or recipe table
102. Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 If desired you can specify a different directory in which to store library components If you specify a different directory FactoryTalk View saves graphic libraries that you add or create in the new directory Similarly when you open a library component FactoryTalk View looks for the component in the specified directory If you specify a different directory but want to use the libraries that come with FactoryTalk View use My Computer or Windows Explorer to copy the library component files into the directory you ve specified or else change the path back to the default path when you want to open a FactoryTalk View library component To specify a new path for graphic libraries 1 On the Tools menu click Options 19 19 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Options General String Pop Up Graphic library location CA Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents ASYiew T Enterprises ME Libranies i Cancel Help For details about using the Options dialog box see Help Importing images into your application You can use these types of external graphic files in your graphic displays m bmp bitmap images jpg JPEG images m dxf AutoCAD files wmf Windows metafiles You import and place dxf and wmf files in your displays in one step Once imported they are converted to drawing objects For more information about
103. ER S GUIDE 23 14 Mathematical functions Use math functions to calculate the square root log natural or base 10 or trigonometry ratios in radians or degrees of a tag This function Returns this value SQRT expression The square root of the expression LOG expression The natural log of the expression LOG10 expression The base ten log of the expression SIN expression The sine of the expression in radians COS expression The cosine of the expression in radians TAN expression The tangent of the expression in radians ARCSIN expression The arc sine of the expression in radians ARCCOS expression The arc cosine of the expression in radians ARCTAN expression The arc tangent of the expression in radians SIND expression The sine of the expression in degrees COSD expression The cosine of the expression in degrees TAND expression The tangent of the expression in degrees ARCSIND expression The arc sine of the expression in degrees ARCCOSD expression The arc cosine of the expression in degrees ARCTAND expression The arc tangent of the expression in degrees 23 Using expressions Security functions Use security functions to control access to your application These functions allow you to determine a user s identity or security rights in order to limit access to the application based on these criteria This fu
104. Function keys assigning to graphic objects 21 5 G Gauge graphic object 20 6 21 43 21 46 at run time 17 18 specifying number format for 15 16 Global connections 8 1 setting up 8 2 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE using to change displays remotely 8 4 13 7 using to monitor memory usage 8 7 using to print displays remotely 8 5 using to run macros 8 6 30 3 Global Connections editor 8 2 19 30 Global object displays creating 25 7 exporting to XML H 1 importing XML H 3 Global object parameters 25 1 setting up 25 10 specifying tags for 25 13 using with process faceplates 25 11 Global objects 25 1 animating 22 17 25 9 creating 25 7 25 8 exporting to XML H 1 importing XML H 3 using global object parameters with 25 10 See also Base objects Reference objects Goto configure mode button graphic object a 20 4 21 17 using to navigate 13 3 Goto display button graphic object 20 4 21 35 and alarms 9 30 9 31 and diagnostics messages 10 11 and information messages 27 7 assigning visibility animation to 11 24 using parameter files with 25 2 using to navigate 13 3 13 4 Graphic displays 19 1 changing remotely 8 4 13 7 security issues 8 4 setting up 8 4 using global connections 8 4 when a user logs out 11 23 creating 19 3 creating a background for 19 14 default ALARM 9 6 DIAGNOSTICS 10 10 INFORMATION 27 6
105. INTEGRATED PRODUCTION amp PERFORMANCE SUITE LISTEN THN SONE USER S GUIDE VOLUME 2 PUBLICATION VIEW ME UMO005E EN E August 2007 Supersedes Publication VIEW ME UM005D EN E Rockwell ALLEN BRADLEY e ROCKWELL SOFTWARE Automation Contacting Rockwell Copyright Notice Trademark Notices Other Trademarks Warranty Customer Support Telephone 1 440 646 3434 Online support http support rockwellautomation com 2007 Rockwell Automation Technologies Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Automation Technologies Inc Any reproduction and or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation Technologies Inc is strictly prohibited Please refer to the license agreement for details Allen Bradley ControlLogix FactoryTalk PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 5 Rockwell Automation Rockwell Software RSLinx RSView the Rockwell Software logo and VersaView are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc The following logos and products are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc RSMACC RSLogix Data Highway Plus DH RSView FactoryTalk View RSView Studio FactoryTalk View Studio PanelBuilder Panel View RS View Machine Edition RSView ME Station and WINtelligent FactoryTalk Activation FactoryTalk Administration Console FactoryTalk Alarms and Events FactoryTalk Automation Platform FactoryT
106. Macros RecipePlus The Explorer window lists the components you create under the icon for the editor you used to create the component You can use the Images editor to copy bitmap images into your application but not to create new images Each image you copy is listed as a component under the editor To view a list of components for an editor l Click the symbol to the left of the editor icon or double click the editor name Working with components This section describes how to perform basic operations that are common to all components 18 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Fi Save tool i Close button on the title bar Close Close button in component 18 2 For information on working with components in particular editors see the chapters later in this guide Creating components To create a new component do one of the following m Drag the component icon into the workspace m Right click the editor and then click New m On the File menu select New and then click the type of component to create Opening components To open a component do one of the following m Double click the component m Right click the component and then click Open m Drag the component from the Explorer window to the workspace Saving components The Save tool is available when the active component contains unsaved changes To save a component 1 On the File menu click Save or click the Save too
107. N6 driver For information about adding drivers in RSLinx see RSLinx Help 4 Expand the RIO tree right click RIO Data and then click Configure RIO 5 In the RIO Configuration dialog box right click RIO and then click Import 6 Browse to the location of the RIO configuration file The file is saved in the root of the application s directory 7 Inthe Communications Setup editor create a device shortcut named PVRIO that points to the RIO data device For information about creating a device shortcut see RSLinx Help 8 Correct any invalid RIO configurations Invalid RIO configurations are highlighted with red x icons 9 Save the converted RIO application Unsupported PanelBuilder RIO tags A PanelBuilder RIO tag will be converted to an HMI memory tag and an error will be logged to the conversion log file if the RIO tag has a blank address has a data type of Bit Array and its address does not have an array size of 1 8 16 or a2 B 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE has a data type of Bit Array and its array size is 16 or 32 but its address does not have a bit offset of 0 has a data type of Bit or BOOL and its address does not contain the bit delimiter character has a data type of 4 BCD Unsigned Integer Signed Integer or INT Character Array or DINT and its address contains the bit delimiter character is a block transfer tag with a data type of Bit Array a
108. NE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 In the Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio double click the modified recipe file The RecipePlus Editor opens 4 Click the Ingredients tab 5 If the data set you want to view is not visible scroll right to see more data sets 29 14 30 Using macros This chapter describes m using macros to assign values to tags m using the Macros editor m when to use macros m running macros when tags or expressions change value m where to assign macros Using macros to assign values to tags A macro is a list of tag assignments stored in a text file in the format lt tag gt lt value gt Each assignment assigns a value to a tag The value can be in the form of another tag an expression a numeric constant or a string Examples Using macros to set tag values Tag 8 Sets the value of Tag1 to 8 Tank 1 Message Tank1 overflow Sets the string tag Tank1 Message to Tank1 overflow Tagl Tag2 Sets the value of Tag to be the same as Tag2 Tagl Tagl 1 Increases the value of Tag by 1 Tagl if Tag2 lt Tag1 then 4 else 3 Performs the if then else calculation and stores the result in Tag 1Pump Industry 2 2Pump Adds the values of Industry 2 and 2Pump and stores the result in 1Pump Brackets surround Industry 2 because of the dash in the name Brackets surround 2Pump because the name starts with a number No brackets are used for 1 Pump because this name is on
109. ON USER S GUIDE 21 60 General Alarm Common m Appearance Border style Border width IV Border uses back color a BB Back color Back style Pattern style E Border color Solid z None z _ Pattern color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial zijo z eu see V Word wrap see m Other V Key navigation 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m In the General tab specify what the banner looks like at run time and whether the operator can navigate to the banner using the keys on the keyboard or keypad Inthe Alarm tab set up whether to queue alarms whether to display all alarms or active alarms only and which alarms to include in a filtered trigger list m Inthe Common tab specify the alarm banner s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up alarm status lists The alarm status list graphic object displays the status of alarms including how many times an alarm has been triggered and how long it has been active For example the list could display an alarm that has been triggered 5 times for a total accumulated time in alarm of 10 minutes The operator can view the status list in three different modes m All alarms displays the status of all alarms that have been defined in the Alarm Setup editor 21 Setting up graphic objects Active alarms
110. Page down Moves the highlight down a page in the list recipe selector or recipe table Move left Scrolls the trend to the left Move right Scrolls the trend to the right For each button that uses auto repeat you can specify these properties Auto repeat rate the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode The default rate is 0 which means that auto repeat is turned off Auto repeat delay the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts 21 Setting up graphic objects To set up auto repeat for a button use one of these methods Inthe Timing tab of the button s Properties dialog box specify the Auto repeat rate and Auto repeat delay properties m Inthe Properties tab of the Property Panel specify the AutoRepeatRate and AutoRepeatDelay properties Ensuring values are read by the data source before sending new values To ensure a value is read by the data source before the operator sends a new value use Enter key handshaking While Enter key handshaking is in effect for an object the operator cannot send a new value to the object s Value connection You can use Enter key handshaking with these graphic objects control list selector m piloted control list selector m numeric input enable button m string input enable button m numeric input cursor point If Enter key handshaking is in effect for one of
111. String display For example Monday December 12 2001 10 47 50 AM system DayOfMonth Analog Day of the month Read only 1 31 system DayOfWeek Analog Day of the week Read only 1 7 Sunday 1 system DayOf Year Analog Day of the year Read only 1 366 system Hour Analog Hour of the day Read and write 0 23 system Minute Analog Minutes 0 59 Read and write system Month Analog Number for month 1 12 Read only system MonthString String Name of the month Read only system Second Analog Seconds 0 59 Read and write system Time String System Time Read only system Year Analog The year 1980 2099 Read only For information about using the data source to update the system date and time or about sending the runtime computer s date and time to the data source see Chapter 8 C 2 User C System tags This tag contains the name of the current user Tag Name Type Function system User String Contains name of logged in user We recommend that you use the expression security function CurrentUserName instead of the system User tag especially if you intend to convert the application to FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition In distributed applications system User returns the name of the user logged into the HMI server not the user logged into the display client For more information about the security functions see page 23 15 C 3 _ Appenbrx D ODBC database schema T
112. To set up a goto display button 1 Double click the goto display button Goto Display Button Properties x General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width 4 M Border uses back color ee BB Back color ack style Pattern style Bl Border color Sold z None _ Pattern color Highlight color Shape E j I Blink Rectangle Display settings Display Parameter file Top position Left position l Display position Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin 0 0 Other M Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time the display to open and the parameter file to use if any m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up close display buttons When the operator presses a close display button at run time the graphic display that the button is on closes You can set up the button to write out a value when the display closes For more information about using close display buttons see page 13 6 To set up a close display button 1 Double click the button 3 Setting Close Display Button Properties x General Label Common Connections
113. Viewer tool 10 5 Digital tags 7 1 logging values for 26 5 monitoring for alarms 9 4 DIN symbols 19 20 Display editor See Graphic Displays editor FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Display list selector graphic object 20 4 21 37 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 using parameter files with 25 2 using to navigate 13 3 13 6 Display number specifying 8 4 8 5 Display print button graphic object 19 30 20 4 21 17 printing trend data with 28 12 using the data source instead of 8 5 Display Settings dialog box 19 11 exporting to XML H 1 importing XML H 3 Display size See Window size Display types 19 12 and navigation 13 4 default 19 3 Displays See Graphic displays Documentation for FactoryTalk View finding P 2 printing 1 1 Drawing objects 20 1 animating 22 2 coloring 20 33 creating 20 12 flipping 20 54 locking into position 20 56 reshaping 20 45 rotating 20 55 Drivers See Communication drivers E Edit mode 19 10 Editor types Alarm Setup 9 3 Data Log Models 26 2 Diagnostics List Setup 10 9 Expression 23 2 Global Connections 8 2 Graphic Displays 19 3 Graphic Libraries 19 15 Images 19 22 Information Messages 27 2 Information Setup 27 3 Local Messages 19 26 Parameters 25 3 Project Settings 4 17 RecipePlus Editor 29 6 29 7 RecipePlus Setup 29 5 Runtime Security 11 3 Editors printing in 2 13 18 5
114. a Logix5000 processor and allow operators to interact with the processor You can use the faceplate graphic displays as stand alone displays or copy the faceplate objects into other graphic displays If desired you can edit the objects in the faceplates For example you might want to add your company logo or change the colors used in the faceplates To use a process faceplate you must add it to your application and specify the path to the Logix5000 processor instructions used by the faceplate The faceplates are set up so that you can specify the path to the instructions using parameter files For more information see the Help for the faceplates accessible from the Add Process Faceplates dialog box You can also use global object parameters to specify the path to the instructions 29 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 14 FactoryTalk View Studio comes with sets of faceplates that work with these Logix5000 instructions m Enhanced PID Logix_PIDE m Discrete 2 State Device Logix_D2SD m Discrete 3 State Device Logix_D3SD Totalizer Logix_TOT m Enhanced Select Logix_ESEL m Alarm Logix_ALM m Ramp Soak Logix_RMPS m PhaseManager Logix_PhaseManager The name in parentheses is the name of the main graphic display and global object display Other displays in the set are named beginning with this name followed by a segment describing the purpose of the subdisplay For example Logix_ALM has two subdi
115. a background for your display see page 19 14 97 Setting up graphic objects This chapter describes how to set up graphic objects It describes how to set up objects spatial properties names and visibility work with objects that have states position objects for touch screens assign function keys to buttons use the keyboard to navigate to and select objects at run time link buttons to lists and trends repeat a button s action by holding down the button ensure values are read by the data source before sending new values set up objects For objects that are not described in other chapters of the manual this chapter provides information about how to use the objects For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about creating and setting up the trend graphic object see Chapter 28 For information about creating and setting up the RecipePlus graphic objects see Chapter 29 Setting up objects spatial properties names and visibility Every graphic object has a Common tab in its Properties dialog box Use the Common tab to set up the following properties for the object m height and width m top and left position m name m visibility For ActiveX and trend objects you can also set up these properties m focus highlight m key navigation FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 2 Momentary Push Button Properties x General States Common Connect
116. able for any reason for example the card is removed or the network drive becomes unavailable data logging stops It does not restart until you restart the application Logging to a network location To log data to a network location the network drive must be shared and the runtime computer must be logged in to the same domain as the computer on the network To do this the user must have access rights for the domain The Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal cannot be part of a domain However you can verify that the user who is logged into the Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal is on a user list that is part of a domain For more information about logging in to a Windows domain or authenticating users see page 17 1 Data logging methods There are two methods for triggering data logging You can set up logging so tag values are logged m periodically periodic logging m only when a tag value changes on change logging Logging periodically Periodic logging is used to take a snapshot of all tag values at a particular point in time Tag values are logged even if there has been no change You cannot change the periodic log rate at run time Logging on change On change logging is used to log only tags whose values have changed For HMI tags before logging occurs the change must equal a specified percentage of change in the tag value The percentage is based on HMI tags minimum and maximum values as
117. acro3 Macro4 and Macro5 in order to work with global connections For more information about global connections see Chapter 8 Example Using macros to reset tag values This example shows you how to run a macro whenever the operator needs to reset production information tags to known values The macro writes the desired values to the tags whenever the operator presses a momentary push button 1 Create a memory tag called ResetProdData 2 Create amomentary push button with the caption Reset Production Data Assign the ResetProdData tag to the Value connection 3 Create a macro called Macrol with these tag assignments TotalProductionUnits 0 LineDownTime 0 TotalRejects 0 4 Inthe Global Connections editor assign the ResetProdData tag to the Remote Macrol connection When the operator presses the Reset Production Data button the value of the ResetProdData tag changes from 0 to 1 This tells FactoryTalk View to run Macrol which writes the specified values to the tags in the macro 30 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Where to assign macros Once you ve created the macros you want to use assign the macros in these editors In this editor Do this Startup Assign application startup and shutdown macros Graphics Assign macros to run when displays open or close using the Display Settings dialog box Runtime Security Assign macros to run when users log in and log out Macros that yo
118. ady open To undock a toolbar m Click the double grab bars at the left or top of the toolbar and then drag Press the Ctrl key to prevent accidental redocking 19 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 8 To move an undocked toolbar m Click the toolbar s title bar and then drag Press the Ctrl key to prevent accidental redocking To dock a toolbar m Click the toolbar s title bar and then drag to any edge of the workspace To close a toolbar m Onthe View menu select Toolbars and then click the name of the toolbar to close or click the toolbar s Close button Showing displays in grayscale You can set displays to appear in grayscale especially for developing applications that will run on the Panel View Plus grayscale terminals When Show Displays in Grayscale is checked on the View menu all open displays will change from full color to grayscale When Show Displays in Grayscale is cleared all open displays will appear in color Show Displays in Grayscale does not work in Test Application mode Third party ActiveX objects will not appear in grayscale if Show Displays in Grayscale is checked Using the grid To size and position objects precisely use the grid You can change the grid settings at any time during the drawing process The grid can be active or passive When the grid is active all the objects you draw or position are pulled to the closest grid point This makes it easy to a
119. ag Pressing one button cancels another Although interlocked push buttons work as a group you add them to the display one at a time When the operator presses one of the interlocked push buttons the tag assigned to its Value connection changes to one value When the operator presses a different interlocked push button the tag changes to another value Assign the same tag to each button s Value connection You can also use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a tag To set up an interlocked push button 1 Double click the interlocked push button Interlocked Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 IV Border uses back color E Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Button Value D Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin 0 0 Other MV Audio Cancel Apply Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify the button s appearance and the value it sends to the Value connection m Inthe States tab specify what the button looks like when it is pressed and released at run time For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag with which the button exchange
120. age used to edit the application For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 5 Click Import B 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Machine Edition Import Wizard Import Type Select the import type PanelBuilder Application ob PanelBuilder 1400e Application pyc Panel iew Terminal pa ASview Machine Edition Project med omei _ Heb 6 Follow the steps in the Machine Edition Import Wizard For details about the options in the Machine Edition Import Wizard see Help When you complete the steps of the wizard FactoryTalk View Studio converts the PanelBuilder application creates the converted application s folders and files and then displays the converted application in the Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio If there are any messages about conversion they are displayed automatically in the Project Status dialog box The converted application is created in the ME HMI projects directory in a folder with the same name as the application name you specified in step 2 This is the path to the ME HMI projects directory Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Conversion messages are saved in a file called Convert log in the HMI projects directory B Convertin
121. al 5 Flip Horizontal 20 54 Examples Spacing objects vertically and horizontally Centers are separated by an equal vertical distance lt gt Select objects Space vertically l l l lt gt Centers are Separated by an equal horizontal distance I l l Select objects Space horizontally Flipping drawing objects Flipping an object creates a mirror image of the object You can flip all the drawing objects or groups of drawing objects except text images and panels To flip a drawing object 1 Click the object 2 On the Arrange menu click a Flip menu item or click a tool on the Graphics toolbar This tool or menu item Flips selected objects Flip Vertical Top to bottom upside down Flip Horizontal Left to right K Rotate tool 20 Using graphic objects Examples Flipping drawing objects vertically and horizontally E E E m m Jm E s Select object Flip vertical E E E E E m m u u Select object Flip horizontal Rotating drawing objects You can rotate all the drawing objects or groups of drawing objects except images panels and rounded rectangles You can attach rotation animation to the same drawing objects With rotation animation the object rotates around an anchor point to indicate a tag s value at run time For details about rotation animation see page 22 13 When you rotate text it rotates around the anchor point but the text itself remai
122. alarm log file or any combination of active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms It can also show the alarms for specific alarm triggers You can assign a tag or expression to the ActiveAcknowledged ActiveUnacknowledged InactiveAcknowledged or InactiveUnacknowledged connections to allow the data source to control the type of alarms to display in the list When one of the connection s values is a non zero value the related type of alarm is displayed in the alarm list The connection value overrides the setting for the list in the Alarm List Properties dialog box FactoryTalk View comes with two graphic displays ALARM MULTI LINE and HISTORY that contain alarm list objects The HISTORY display comes in two sizes These displays are in the graphic library You can copy the library displays into your application and use the displays and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using alarm lists see page 9 32 For information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 To set up an alarm list 1 Double click the alarm list Alarm List Properties Ed geossosoecesesseseseseg gt Appearance Border style Border width iv v Raisedinset gt fe 4 hiss back color BB Border color E Header back color BB Header fore color BB Selection back color C Selection fore color Text Font Size fos Jho wl 2 of Other V Key navigation I Wrap around
123. alk Services Platform FactoryTalk Diagnostics FactoryTalk Directory FactoryTalk Live Data RSAssetSecurity and FactoryTalk Security PanelView RSLinx Classic RSLinx Enterprise SLC 5 and SLC 500 ActiveX Microsoft Microsoft Access SQL Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual SourceSafe Windows Windows ME Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation OLE for Process Control is a registered trademark of the OPC Foundation Oracle SQL Net and SQL Plus are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged This product is warranted in accord with the product license The product s performance may be affected by system configuration the application being performed operator control maintenance and other related factors Rockwell Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors The instructions in this document do no
124. alue Foreground Solid Bink IE Background Solid amp Bik EE Default Colors Blink rate 5 econds 2 Apply Delete Close Help Copying or duplicating objects with animation You can copy or duplicate objects that have animation attached to them When you do the animation attached to the objects is also copied or duplicated If you copy or duplicate a group the copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original For information about copying and duplicating objects see pages 20 42 and 20 43 Copying animation without copying objects If you have attached animation to an object you can copy the animation and paste it onto another object If the object has more than one type of animation all animation is copied and pasted Note that you can only copy animation to an object that supports the same type of animation To copy and paste animation 1 Select the object that has the animation you want to copy 2 On the Edit menu click Copy Animation or right click the object and then click Copy Animation 22 16 22 Animating graphic objects 3 Select the objects to copy the animation to 4 On the Edit menu click Paste Animation To paste to a single object you can right click the object and then click Paste Animation Setting up animation for global objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copi
125. alue the next time the button is pressed and released This button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process but not for starting the machine or process For details see page 21 21 Latched push button Start a machine or process The button remains set latched until the process is complete For example use this button to start a bag filling machine When the process is complete the bag is full the button is reset unlatched by the Handshake connection For details see page 21 23 20 4 Use this graphic object 20 Using graphic objects To do this Multistate push button Cycle through a series of values Each time the operator presses the button the value for the next state is sent to the tag When the button is in its last state pressing it changes the button to its first state and writes out the first state value This button is useful when you want the operator to see and select multiple options in sequence using a single button The button displays the current state of an operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect the different states For details see page 21 24 Interlocked push button Use a group of buttons to send values to the same tag When the operator presses one button in the group the button s value is sent to the tag and the button remains highlighted as long as the tag value is the same as the button s value Pressing another button in the group r
126. alue and an array tag has been assigned to the object s Value connection To set up a multistate indicator l Double click the multistate indicator 21 39 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Multistate Indicator Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width Raisedinset 3 MV Border uses back color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Number of states Trigger type 4 a Value z OK Cancel Help kK 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m In the General tab specify what the indicator looks like and the number of states for the indicator m Inthe States tab specify how the indicator s appearance changes when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 m Inthe Common tab specify the indicator s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the indicator receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up symbols The symbol is an indicator that displays a single monochrome image that changes color to match the state of a process or operation This allows the operator to see the status of a process or operation at a glan
127. ample Using write expressions In this example the operator regulates the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value in feet or meters per second When the operator enters the value in meters per second the value is converted to feet per second before being passed to the data source The operator first indicates whether the value is in feet or meters by pushing a maintained push button The push button has one state corresponding to feet per second and the other state to meters per second Then the operator presses the numeric input enable button and enters the value for the conveyor speed in a numeric pop up keypad The character in the write expression is the placeholder for the value the operator enters To set up the maintained push button 1 In the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box in the States tab set up these States m State 0 Value 0 Caption Feet S m State 1 Value 1 Caption Meters S 2 Inthe Connections tab assign a digital tag called Feet_or_meters to the Value connection either an HMI tag or a data server tag To set up the numeric input enable button 1 In the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box in the Label tab type the caption Enter conveyor speed 2 In the Connections tab assign a tag called Conveyor_speed to the Value connection 3 Assign this expression to the Optional Exp connection if Feet_or_meters 0 then else 3 281 FactoryTalk View writes the
128. an use these instructions to set up any of the buttons in the list For example on the General tab for the acknowledge all alarms button and the clear alarm history button you can specify a subset of alarms to which the button s action applies For details about filtering alarm triggers see page 9 5 To set up a button 1 Double click the button 21 17 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 18 Login Button Properties x General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color 4 BB Back Color Back style Pattern style Hl Border Color Solid None _ Pattern Color E Highlight color a I Blink Rectangle X Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo o Other MV Audio Cancel Help In the button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time For some buttons you can specify whether to link the button to a specific object In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Timing tab set up whether or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 13 The Timing tab is available only for the move up move down move left move right page up and page down button
129. and the triggers to filter by if any 21 61 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 62 m Inthe Common tab specify the alarm status list s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up diagnostics lists The diagnostics list graphic object displays runtime information about system activity Information messages such as messages about tag assignments tag read and write activity and macro usage These are system generated information messages They are not the same messages as the information messages you create and display in the information message display object m Warning messages m Error messages such as messages about communication errors invalid values and unassigned connections m Audit messages about tag writes and tag write failures FactoryTalk View comes with a default graphic display called DIAGNOSTICS that contains a diagnostics list object You can use the display and object as is customize them or create your own For more information about using diagnostics lists see page 10 11 To set up a diagnostics list 1 Double click the diagnostics list 21 Setting up graphic objects Diagnostics List Properties x General Common Appearance Border style Border width IV Border uses back color BB Back color BB Border color L Fore color L Selection back color BB Select
130. anel View Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual To print graphic displays at run time use one or both of these methods m Create display print buttons in the graphic displays you want to print At run time the operator presses the buttons to print the displays For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 m Assign a tag or expression to the Remote Display Print connection in the Global Connections editor When the value of the tag or expression changes from 0 to a non zero value the current displays are automatically printed Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want the data printed For more information about setting up remote display printing see page 8 5 90 Using graphic objects This chapter describes the types of graphic objects and outlines how to m create graphic objects including drawing and ActiveX objects m select and deselect objects and use the Object Explorer m use the Properties dialog box and Property Panel to set up objects m color and name objects m test how objects look in different states m assign tags and expressions to objects m replace tags using tag substitution m use tag placeholders m move copy duplicate resize reshape and delete objects m group and ungroup objects and edit group objects m arrange objects and lock objects into position For information about setting up graphic objects once you ve creat
131. anelBuilder applications m names of equivalent graphic objects in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View m PanelBuilder graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View m PanelBuilder settings and controls that are not supported in FactoryTalk View how communications are converted and which PanelBuilder communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View m converting PanelBuilder Remote I O communications m PanelBuilder graphic object features that are not supported in FactoryTalk View with information about how to achieve the same result when possible This appendix uses the term PanelBuilder to refer to both PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 features For information about converting applications from PanelBuilder 1400e see Appendix A Terminology This section describes terms that are different in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder term FactoryTalk View term screen display graphic display programmable controller data source control connection In FactoryTalk View the data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is configured to exchange information in the form of B 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling The general term data source
132. anese or Korean UTF 16 is recommended The first line of every XML file contains XML version and encoding attributes Make sure the encoding attribute matches the format that you are going to use when you save the file For example if the original file was saved in UTF 8 format and you plan to save it in UTF 16 format make sure the first line specifies encoding UTF 16 Testing XML files An XML file must be well formed to be imported To find out whether your XML file is well formed test it To test an XML file 1 Open the XML file in Internet Explorer H Importing and exporting graphics XML files If you can see the XML code your file 1s well formed If the XML code is not well formed Internet Explorer displays an error message Importing XML files You can import a graphic display or global object display that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import an XML file that you originally exported from FactoryTalk View and then modified When you import a graphic display or global object display your existing display will be overwritten Back up your application first using the Application Manager tool Or you can save a copy of your existing display by exporting it to an XML file before you import the new one Error log file If errors occur during importing the errors are logged to a text file The file opens automatically when importing is finished The last paragraph of the
133. aphic object a 20 7 21 16 using with alarm objects 9 8 9 35 Acknowledge all alarms button graphic object a 9 8 20 8 21 16 using with alarm lists 9 36 ActiveX objects 20 2 animating 22 2 at run time 17 17 17 18 creating 20 21 navigating to 21 7 using to display tag values 20 6 20 9 using to set tag values 20 5 20 9 Addressing syntax for HMI tags 7 5 Logix5000 7 6 Adobe Reader 1 1 ALARM BANNER display editing 9 26 Alarm banner graphic object 20 10 21 59 at run time 9 33 17 19 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 specifying time and date format for 15 16 using buttons with 9 35 ALARM display 9 6 editing 9 25 window size 4 14 Alarm display opening and closing 9 25 9 31 remotely 9 25 Alarm Import Export Wizard E 1 Alarm list graphic object 20 10 21 58 at run time 9 32 17 19 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 specifying time and date format for 15 16 using buttons with 9 35 Alarm log file 4 3 9 10 deleting at application startup 15 15 printing contents of 9 10 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Alarm messages resetting status of 9 9 9 24 9 40 embedded variables in 24 2 remotely 9 25 exporting to XML E 1 responding to 9 7 handshaking 9 21 retaining status of 9 40 importing XML E 3 sending messages to the data source 9 22 multiple languages for 9 5 9 17 setting up 9 2 printing at runtime 9 10 sil
134. argins see page 21 4 For information about key navigation see page 21 8 For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 States Set up the states for the object including the value for each state and whether to display a caption or image for the state For information about checking that the states are set up the way you intended see page 20 35 Label For objects that don t have multiple states specify whether to use a caption or image on the object For information about using the Image Browser to select an image to use in the label see page 19 23 Timing Set up the object s auto repeat see page 21 12 or Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 settings Common Set up the object s spatial properties name and visibility For details see page 21 1 Connections Assign tags and expressions to the object s connections For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 The tabs that are available depend on the object m Some objects have only General and Common tabs m If an object can have more than one state the object s Properties dialog box contains a States tab m Some objects have unique tabs that are not listed in the table above m The tabs that an ActiveX object has depends on the vendor s implementation though if you can assign tags or expressions to the object it has a Connections tab 20 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE
135. ase object Reference objects also have a property called LinkBaseObject which specifies the name and location of the base object to which the reference object is linked You cannot edit the LinkBaseObject property 290 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 10 To change a reference object s link properties 1 Double click the object to open the Property Panel 2 Make your changes to the link properties 3 Specify the new size connections or animation for the object For information about resizing objects see page 20 44 For information about assigning connections to objects see page 20 31 For information about assigning animation to objects see Chapter 22 To specify default link properties for reference objects 1 On the Edit menu select Global Object Defaults 2 Specify the new default values 3 Click OK The defaults are used for any new reference objects you create You can still edit the properties for individual objects separately To break the link to a base object 1 Right click the reference object and then click Break Link The reference object becomes a regular object You can edit all of its properties However you cannot restore the connection to the base object Deleting the base object If you delete a base object or a global object display containing base objects any reference objects that are linked to the deleted base objects are broken A broken reference object is displayed
136. ation as well as in an expression to control some other aspect of animation when you set up visibility set the Expression true state to Invisible If you do not do this the object could appear briefly in its design time location and orientation before animating properly For more information about setting up visibility animation see Help Example Using visibility animation to set up security for a graphic display This example shows how to use visibility animation to control what operators can see In a graphic display that all users have access to only the Admin user can see the graphic object to which this animation is attached This example uses the security function CurrentUserName The function returns the string value of the Account ID user name for the user who is currently logged in The CurrentUserName function is case sensitive All user names use uppercase letters so make sure that you use uppercase letters in your expression To specify which user can view an object in a display 1 Select the object to limit visibility to 2 Open the Animation dialog box and click the Visibility tab 3 In the Expression box type this CurrentUserName ADMIN 4 For the Expression true state click Visible 5 Click Apply and then click Close At run time the object is visible only if the Admin user is logged in Setting up color animation With color animation an object changes color based on a tag value or
137. ators return true false values The security function CurrentUserHasCode x also returns a true false value The security function CurrentUserName returns a string value The language function CurrentLanguage returns a string value Expressions that use if then else logic can return numeric values true false values or text strings depending on how they are structured These are called conditional expressions because the result of the expression depends on whether the If statement is true or false When the If statement evaluates to true the result is defined by the Then statement When the If statement is false the result is defined by the Else statement The Objects 5 Screen Demo sample application contains many examples of expressions For example see the alarm trigger expressions in the Alarm Setup editor Using the Expression editor To create an expression you can m type it directly in the Tag or expression column for any connection that accepts expressions or in the Expression box for animation m open the Expression editor and then create the expression in the editor Using the Expression editor versus typing expressions directly Once you are familiar with expression syntax you might find it quicker to create short expressions by typing them directly in the Tag or expression column The Expression editor allows you to see more text at once which is useful for longer more complicated expressions A
138. bject animation Test your animation to ensure you achieve the intended results To apply animation to objects within groups use the group edit feature For details see page 20 48 Checking the animation on objects To see what type of animation has been set up for an object or group of objects use the Object Explorer the Animation menu or the Animation dialog box For information about using the Object Explorer to highlight objects that have animation attached see page 20 25 To see what type of animation has been set up for objects within a group use the group edit feature or the Object Explorer For information about using the group edit feature see page 20 48 To view the animation on an object using the Animation menu 1 Select an object 2 View the animation by doing one of the following m Click the Animation menu and see which items have a check mark m Right click the object and then select Animation to see which items have a check mark To view the animation on an object using the Animation dialog box 1 Select an object 2 On the View menu click Animation 22 15 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE When the Animation dialog box opens look at which tabs have check marks on them to see which types of animation have been set up Animation Flotation woi O Height Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider v Color OLE Vert Expression mem animColorFill Tags j Expression V
139. bjects except images and panels For more information about setting up width animation see Help Setting up height animation With height animation an object s height changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object s height will be halfway between its minimum and maximum percentage Height animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up height animation see Help Setting up rotation animation With rotation animation an object rotates around an anchor point based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will rotate half the specified amount Rotation animation is available for all drawing objects except images panels and rounded rectangles If you apply rotation animation to text the text rotates around the anchor point but remains in the upright position For more information about setting up rotation animation see Help Setting up horizontal slider animation With horizontal slider animation you can use a drawing object to set the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object At run time when the operator moves
140. can use the Insert State and Delete State buttons in the States tab to add and remove states without returning to the General tab The Number of States setting on the General tab is automatically updated For more information about the Insert State and Delete State buttons see Help Setting up how objects are used at run time Just as you must provide operators with a way to navigate between displays at run time you must also make sure that operators can use the objects within the displays The next sections in this chapter describe how to set up your objects so the operator can m press objects using a touch screen 21 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 4 m use function keys to press buttons when a mouse or touch screen is not available on the runtime computer m use the keyboard or keypad to navigate to and select lists trends and ActiveX input objects m use buttons to work with lists and trends m repeat a button s action by pressing and holding it m ensure that tag values are read by the data source before sending new values Positioning objects for touch screens If the operator will be using a touch screen at run time keep these tips in mind when positioning graphic objects in your displays m Don t place important buttons where they ll be blocked by an On Top display The user can t press a covered button Ensure buttons are large enough for users to touch easily m Use t
141. ce 21 40 21 Setting up graphic objects The error state The symbol s error state is displayed at run time when the Indicator connection is unassigned the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator connection value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Value connection does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to Value and an array tag has been assigned to the object s Value connection To set up a symbol l Double click the symbol Symbol Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 Shape Rectangle X Symbol settings Number of states Trigger type 4 X Value X Image ARROWRT A OK Cancel Help ok In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the symbol looks like at run time and the number of states for the symbol m Inthe States tab specify how the symbol s appearance changes when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 21 41 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 42 Inthe Common tab specify the symbol s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connectio
142. ch as Auto to Manual or Metric to Imperial Latched push buttons latch in the on position and must be unlatched by another button or process to return to the off position This type of button is useful for starting a machine or process Multistate push buttons allow an operator to cycle through multiple options consecutively using a single button The current state of a process or operation is displayed on the button by a different color caption or image for each state 21 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 20 Interlocked push buttons work in groups and share the same tag Pressing one button cancels another Although interlocked push buttons work as a group you add them to the display one at a time Ramp buttons increase or decrease the value of a tag by either an integer or floating point value You can use two ramp buttons together to create an increment decrement control for example for the speed of a motor Or you can use a numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point For information about the numeric input enable button see page 21 30 For information about the numeric input cursor point see page 21 32 Setting up momentary push buttons Use the momentary push button to start a process or action When pressed the button changes a tag to one value and when released the button changes the tag to another value The momentary push button s states can perform one of three kinds of a
143. ch languages at run time Resizing displays The project window size is used for all Replace displays If you change the project window size after you have designed any graphic displays you have the option of scaling graphic displays If you choose to scale graphic displays all Replace and On Top displays are resized and the objects in them are scaled to fit the new size You can also specify whether to scale the font size and border size of the graphic objects and the size of graphic images in the Images folder If you choose not to scale displays when you change the project window size Replace displays are resized but any objects in the displays remain the same size and in the same position as before On Top displays are not resized For information about specifying the project window size see page 4 11 Changing the display area while working You can change the display area of a display while you re working on it by dragging the border of the display area For example you might want to make the display area smaller so you can see parts of two displays in order to drag and drop objects between them 19 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Changing the display area in this manner does not change the display size for Replace displays For On Top displays that are sized with the Use Current Size option dragging the border does resize the display Another way to arrange multiple displays while working on th
144. click Unlock All Wallpaper All objects in the graphic display are converted back to their original state Using graphic libraries FactoryTalk View Studio comes with a set of libraries contained in the Libraries folder As with a public library the graphics libraries can provide you with source materials and reference information 19 14 Fi Save tool 19 Using graphic displays Each graphic library consists of a graphic display with the file extension gfx The library displays contain graphic objects that you might find useful in your own application Many of the objects are preconfigured with animation For example see the Conveyor parts library You can m look at the objects and displays to get ideas for your own application m drag and drop or copy and paste objects from the libraries into your own displays For information about copying objects from a library into your graphic display see page 20 42 m use the objects as they are or change them to suit your needs m create your own libraries of objects m create libraries of displays that are translated into multiple languages m use libraries as displays in your application To open a graphic library 1 In the Explorer window open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder 2 Double click the library name or right click it and then click Open Creating graphic libraries You can create a graphic library in the Libraries folder or create a graph
145. connection For more information about using the numeric input cursor point at run time see page 17 6 You can also set up the numeric input cursor point to work as a ramp button In this case when the cursor point has focus the operator can press a move up or move down button to change a tag by either an integer or floating point value The operator can also press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow on the keyboard or keypad to ramp the value To set up a numeric input cursor point 1 Double click the numeric input cursor point General Numeric Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset a Oo Back color BB Border color Back style Pattern style E Semen Sold None C Fore color O Highlight color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial fio B z u eee Cer eee Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio MV Key navigation OK Cancel Help ok 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the cursor point looks like at run time and whether the operator can navigate to the cursor point using the keys on the keyboard or keypad 21 32 21 Setting up graphic objects m Inthe Numeric tab set up which pop up window opens if any the ramp value if any minimum and maximum values to send to the data source decimal point settings and disp
146. core character _ To name a group object 1 Select the group object 2 In the Property Panel click the Properties tab 3 Double click the GroupName row and then type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the underscore character _ Testing how objects look in different states To make sure the different states for an object are set up correctly you can view them using the States toolbar or the Property Panel To open the States toolbar 1 Onthe View menu select Toolbars and then click States State To view an object s states using the States toolbar 1 Select one or more objects 2 Inthe States toolbar select the state to view If you selected multiple objects the toolbar shows the states that are common to all the objects 3 To view the next state select it in the toolbar or press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard You can also use these keys to select the next state to view To view the previous state press the Up Arrow key m To view the first state press the Home key 20 35 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 36 m To see the last state press the End key To view an object s states using the Property Panel l 2 gt Select one or more objects In the Property Panel click the State property and then select the state to view To view the next state quickly double click the row or press th
147. create one or more files of information messages Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple message files at the same time i Maintenance Pumphouse Information Messages Trigger Value Tank due for cleaning at 13 00h Tank due for cleaning at 13 00h Check all fittings at dock at 9 00h You can define up to 10 000 messages in each message file For detailed information about the options in the Information Messages editor see Help 27 2 27 Using information messages Setting up how information messages are displayed Use the Information Setup editor to set up how information messages are displayed Information Setup Pumphouse Miel Display Display file name Ew Message file name Maintenance BI Edit Acknowledge hold time Maximum Update Fate 3 seconds n 5 seconds Connection Value coed e For detailed information about the options in the Information Setup editor see Help Preparing to set up information messages As your application is running information is continually sent to the data source about the state of various processes For example your application might be monitoring whether a valve is open or closed or the temperature in a boiler Values representing the status of these processes are sent to the data source The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as
148. cribed in the previous section Add the display into a new application with up to 40 different languages in the new application Export the text for your application which will include the text used in the graphic display Translate the text strings into each desired language saving the file with a new name for each language Import the files for the new languages Add the graphic display with the same name as the display in step 1 to the Libraries folder 19 Using graphic displays The new languages are added to the library Make sure the display contains the same objects as the original display Otherwise the new display will overwrite the previous display and all the original language strings will be undefined What is displayed When you open a library that supports multiple languages the strings are displayed using the current application language if available If the library does not contain the current language the strings are displayed as single question marks Similarly if the library contains the language but not all the strings are defined for the language undefined strings are displayed as single question marks For more information about using multiple languages with graphic libraries see Chapter 12 Location of library components The Libraries folder is located in Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared
149. crosoft Visual Basic Rockwell Automation RSTools and Microsoft Office provide ActiveX objects that are configurable in FactoryTalk View Studio Using the tables The tables beginning on the next page will help you choose which objects to use to control your application machines and process The tables group the objects according to function provide an overview of what each object does and list cross references to more detailed information about using the objects About connections Many of the objects use connections to interact with the data source A connection is the link between the object and the data source Depending on an object s function the object may have more than one connection For example a momentary push button has a Value connection and an Indicator connection The Value connection is used to set a value at the data source and the Indicator connection is used to display the data source value in your graphic display By assigning tags or expressions to an object s connections you control the flow of data between the application and the data source which in turn controls your process or machines Assign tags or expressions to an object s connections in the Connections tab of the object s Properties dialog box see page 20 26 or in the Connections tab of the Property Panel see page 20 29 Illustrating your displays Use this graphic object To do this Text Create text for labels or
150. ctions m Change the Value connection to when the button is pressed and to 0 when the button is released This kind of button is called normally open because its released state is off Pressing the button completes the circuit m Change the Value connection to 0 when the button is pressed and to 1 when the button is released This kind of button is called normally closed because its released state is on Pressing the button breaks the circuit m Change the Value connection to a value you specify You assign the desired values to the button s press and release actions For example 50 when pressed and 100 when released The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a momentary push button 1 Double click the momentary push button 21 Setting up graphic objects Momentary Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width K MV Border Uses Back Color O Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Button settings Button action Normally open C Normally closed C Value Hold time 250 msec Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio OK Cancel Help o 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on eac
151. ctoryTalk View graphic objects Control List Selector s Enter Key Enter button Control List Selector s Down Cursor Move down button Control List Selector s Up Cursor Move up button Screen Select Keypad small and large Display list selector Specify the graphic displays that the display list selector can open Screen Keypad Enable Button Display list selector Specify the graphic displays that the display list selector can open Goto Screen Button Goto display button Return to Previous Screen Button Return to display button ASCII Display String display Numeric Keypad Enable Button Numeric input enable button Normally Open Momentary Momentary push button During conversion the button is set up to be normally Push Button open Normally Closed Momentary Momentary push button During conversion the button is set up to be normally Push Button closed Screen Print Button Display print button Alarm History Sort By Time Sort By Value Button Sort alarms button Alarm Status Reset Qty Time Button Reset alarm status button Alarm Panel Single Line Alarm Window Alarm banner Alarm banner A 6 This PanelBuilder 1400e object Alarm Status Screen Is converted to this FactoryTalk View object Alarm status list A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Notes Clear All Button Print Button in Alarm History sc
152. del is assigned to the trend You can display both current and historical data in the same trend For information about data log models see Chapter 26 28 Setting up trends Time date and number formats The trend is displayed using the time date and number formats of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol the scale on the y axis uses commas for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Summary of steps These are the steps for creating a trend 1 To plot historical data create a data log model in the Data Log Models editor For information see Chapter 26 2 Create a trend graphic object in the Graphics editor as described on page 28 3 3 Set up the trend in the Trend Object Properties dialog box For details about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 If desired create a next pen button a pause button or key buttons in the same graphic display to allow the operator to switch between pens pause the trend or scroll the trend For information about the buttons you can use with trends see page 28 11 5 To keep a printed record of the trend data provide a way for the operator to print the graphic display For information see page 28 12 Creating trend objects To create a trend object 1 In the Graphics editor create or open a graphic display 2 Select the Trend drawing tool by doing one of
153. describes terms that are different in PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder 1400e term FactoryTalk View term screen display graphic display Optional Keypad Write Expression Optional Expression programmable controller data source FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 2 PanelBuilder 1400e term FactoryTalk View term control connection In FactoryTalk View the data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is configured to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling The general term data source is used unless specifically discussing a programmable controller Summary of steps Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder 1400e applications 1 Prepare the application in PanelBuilder 1400e and then convert the application file as described in the next section 2 Specify additional project settings as described on page 4 11 For example if you want the application to have a border around its graphic displays or to use a title bar you can specify these options in the Project Settings editor We recommend that you use the Project Settings editor to change the project window size rather than using the Convert to new window size option in the Machine Edition Import Wizard
154. dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the button using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the operator can press the button to give it focus m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe Numeric tab set up which pop up window opens if any the ramp value if any minimum and maximum values to send to the data source and decimal point settings Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key These settings do not apply when you ramp a value For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expressions with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 21 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up numeric input cursor points The operator can activate the numeric input cursor point to open a numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad The operator can enter a number in the keypad or scratchpad and then send the number to the data source The cursor point displays the current value at the data source if you assign a tag to the Indicator
155. dicator connection Indicates the end of the connections element Indicates the end of the object element Contains attributes from the General and Common tabs in the object s Properties dialog box as well as elements for the object s states and connections Contains state elements for each of the object s states Element lt state stateid 0 gt lt caption gt lt imageSettings gt lt state gt lt state stateid 1 gt lt caption gt lt imageSettings gt lt state gt lt states gt lt connections gt lt connection name Value gt lt connection name Indicator gt lt connections gt lt object2 gt lt gfx gt H Importing and exporting graphics XML files Description Contains attributes for the object s first state as well as elements for the state s caption and image Contains attributes for the state s caption Contains attributes for the state s image Indicates the end of the state element Contains attributes for the object s second state as well as elements for the state s caption and image Contains attributes for the state s caption Contains attributes for the state s image Indicates the end of the state element Indicates the end of the states element Contains a connection element for each connection assigned to the object Contains attributes for the Value connection Contains attributes for the Indicat
156. e The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server Operators can print the display at run time to create a visual record of tag values object states or current messages The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects You can create objects in the Graphics editor or copy them from a global object display from a graphic library or from another application For information about creating and copying graphic objects see Chapter 20 You can use up to 1 000 tags per graphic display This limit includes the tags contained in embedded variables 19 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 2 Before you begin Before you begin plan your displays Think about what information the operator needs to see and the best way to provide the information For example m Does the operator need to know the exact speed of a conveyor belt or just whether the belt is moving jammed or stopped m Do different users need to have access to different types of information m Do you need to limit access to certain types of information Also consider the runtime environment and how the operator will use the application m Does the runtime computer have a touch screen mouse keyboard or some combination of these How will the operator navigate through the displays of the application m Will the application be available in multiple languages Review the chapters
157. e Communication Setup editor add an RIO driver For PanelView Plus 400 and 600 terminals use the 2711P RN1 driver For all other PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminals use the 2711P RN6 driver For information about adding drivers in RSLinx see RSLinx Help 4 Expand the RIO tree right click RIO Data and then click Configure RIO 5 In the RIO Configuration dialog box right click RIO and then click Import 6 Browse to the location of the RIO configuration file The file is saved in the root of the application s directory 7 In the Communications Setup editor create a device shortcut that points to the RIO data device A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications For information about creating a device shortcut see RSLinx Help 8 Apply the shortcut to the RIO driver 9 Correct any invalid RIO configurations Invalid RIO configurations are highlighted with red x icons If red x icons appear after you import the RIO xml file you can fix block tags in the Communication Setup editor in FactoryTalk View The length of block tags must be the same for Read and Write pairs sharing the same rack group and slot 10 Create an alias for any data that is not a 16 bit integer or bit 11 Save the converted RIO application RIO configurations are not saved with the application when you exit Factory Talk View Studio However they are backed up with the application in the Application Manager For inf
158. e Enter key on your keyboard Assigning tags and expressions to graphic objects You can assign tags and expressions to many graphic objects including ActiveX objects depending of course on how the vendor implemented the object This section describes how to assign tags to graphic objects use expressions to manipulate tag values replace tags using tag substitution use tag placeholders so the same display can be used with different sets of tags Assigning tags To assign tags to a graphic object use one of these methods Double click the object to open the object s Properties dialog box and then assign tags in the Connections tab Momentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections Named ooo Tag Expression Tag Expin f L Sa Type the tag name here Or Click the button to open the Tag Browser 20 Using graphic objects m Select the object and then assign tags in the Connections tab of the Property Panel Property Panel HMomentaryPushButtont Momentary Push Bu p Froperties Connections oe eee Ko adele z Or click the button to open the Tag Browser Type the tag name here Yalue Type Long Returns the control state value of the object Te m Select the object and then on the Edit menu click Connections Assign tags in the Connections tab of the Properties dialog box m Right click the object and then click Connections Assign tags
159. e a macro to set Selector the appropriate tag values for the objects connections For information about macros see Chapter 30 Assign the macro in the Startup editor For details see Help Multistate Indicator Message Display Print Setting Bar Graph Inner text and inner graphic Converted to a separate text object and image object Gauge Inner text and inner graphic Converted to a separate text object and image object Scale clipping If the scale doesn t fit within the height or width of the gauge it is not clipped Check the position of the scale to ensure it doesn t overlap other objects Converted to a separate gauge object if Needle the gauge had 2 needles each needle is converted to a separate gauge object Alarm List No Acknowledgement Required All alarms can be acknowledged All objects Image placement FactoryTalk View supports one three or nine positions for images depending on the type of object On conversion images are positioned using the closest match Therefore some images might be clipped to fit the object All objects Turn Object View On property If this property is set to False the converted object has a transparent background no border no caption and no image All objects Blinking inner graphics If the inner graphic uses a color image it will not blink Use a monochrome image if you want the inner graphic to blink _ Aprenbr C System tags This appendix describ
160. e and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object The copies of the object are called reference objects and they have the same properties as the original base object If desired you can assign unique size connections and animation to the reference object To assign unique properties to the reference object use the Property Panel to edit the following properties for the reference object m LinkSize select False to set up the height and width separately for the reference object If LinkSize is set to true when you try to resize the reference object it will snap back to its linked size m LinkConnections select False to set up connections separately for the reference object Whether you use the base object s connections or set up separate connections the tags used count towards the tag limit for the display You can assign tag placeholders to the connections for base objects and to connections for reference objects with the LinkConnections property set to False LinkAnimation select Do not link to set up separate animation for the reference object To use the animation set up for the base object but assign different expressions to the reference object select Link without expressions If you select Link with expressions the reference object uses the animation and expressions assigned to the b
161. e corresponds to UTF 16 file format For files containing strings in English or other Latin based languages UTF 8 is recommended to reduce the size of the XML file For other languages such as Chinese Japanese or Korean UTF 16 is recommended The first line of every XML file contains XML version and encoding attributes Make sure the encoding attribute matches the format that you are going to use when you save the file For example if the original file was saved in UTF 8 format and you plan to save it in UTF 16 format make sure the first line specifies encoding UTF 16 Testing XML files An XML file must be well formed to be imported To find out whether your XML file is well formed test it To test an XML file 1 Open the XML file in Internet Explorer If you can see the XML code your file is well formed If the XML code is not well formed Internet Explorer displays an error message Importing XML files You can import an alarm setup that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import an XML file that you originally exported from FactoryTalk View and then modified When you import an alarm setup your existing alarm setup will be overwritten Back up your application first using the Application Manager tool Or you can save a copy of your existing alarm setup by exporting it to an XML file before you import the new one E Importing and exporting alarm XML files Error log file
162. e information see the next section 2 Create graphic objects in the global object display These are the base objects Set up their appearance animation and connections 3 Copy or drag base objects into a standard graphic display The copied objects are reference objects For more information see page 25 8 4 Edit the link properties of the reference objects as desired For more information see page 25 9 Creating global object displays and base objects You can create a global object display in the Global Objects folder or create a graphic display in the Displays folder and then add the display to the Global Objects folder You can also add library displays to the Global Objects folder The objects you create in the global object displays are called base objects To create a global object display 1 In the Graphics folder right click Global Objects and then click New 2 Create graphic objects in the display These are the base objects You can not use ActiveX objects as base objects You cannot convert objects to wallpaper in the global object display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 3 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool 4 Inthe Component name box type a name for the display and then click OK The display is added to the list in the Global Objects folder To add a display or library to the Global Objects folder 1 In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right cl
163. e the color of the objects or add and remove buttons Or you can create your own graphic display to use for displaying information messages In the Information Setup editor specify the display to use Another option is to place the information message display object in a graphic display that doesn t open automatically when a message is generated For information about creating your own information message display see page 27 7 The information message display graphic object The INFORMATION display contains an information message display graphic object which lists one information message at a time For information about how the information message display object works at run time see page 27 7 Buttons in the INFORMATION display The INFORMATION display contains these buttons This button Does this Ack information acknowledge Acknowledges the information message Close close display Closes the information message graphic display You can assign any caption you choose to the labels on the buttons 27 Using information messages Using the information acknowledge button When the operator presses the information acknowledge button if the Ack connection is assigned the connection value is set to at the data source The value is held as long as the operator presses the button or for the acknowledge hold time whichever is longer Then the connection is reset to 0 Creating your own information message disp
164. e uses a comma for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 String embedded variables For string embedded variables that do not use a fixed number of characters the entire string tag value is displayed unless a null character is read Nothing after a null character is displayed If a fixed number of characters is used the variable displays the value of the tag up to the number of characters specified unless a null character is encountered before the specified length Nothing is displayed after a null character If necessary spaces are used to make up the required number of characters Null characters have a hex value of 0 The null character indicates the end of string input It does not add to the actual string length If the string is longer than the specified number of characters it is truncated to fit the number of characters If the SHOWSTAR option is used an asterisk replaces the first or last character displayed If the embedded variable is set up to display right most characters excess characters are truncated at the left end of the string and the asterisk if used appears at the left Otherwise the right most characters are truncated and the asterisk if used appears at the right Literal strings are displayed using the same rules as string tag values Time and date embedded variables For embedded variables that show both the time and the date a space is placed between t
165. ePlus selector graphic object Delete the button Delete the selector G 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To remove or replace this feature RecipePlus table graphic object Acknowledge all alarms button with a filtered trigger Print alarm history button with a filtered trigger Do this Delete the table Clear the Filtered triggers box Clear the Filtered triggers box Print alarm status button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Clear alarm history button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Clear alarm history button with the Reset alarm status option cleared Select Reset alarm status Features that are not supported in version 3 10 or earlier The features listed in the previous tables are not supported in version 3 10 of RS View ME Station In addition these version 3 20 alarm options are not supported in version 3 10 nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Alarm list graphic object with an unsupported combination of alarm conditions Do this Do one of the following m Select the Display check box for each alarm condition Select the Display check box for only these alarm conditions Active and unacknowledged Inactive and unacknowledged Alarm list graphic object with Blink selected for one or more alarm conditions
166. ead again after this Defining a range of motion To define a range of motion for an object do one of the following m Use the mouse to move the object in the display This uses the Object Smart Path feature to visually define the range of motion m Type values in the At minimum and At maximum boxes Motion can be defined in pixels percentages or degrees 22 6 22 Animating graphic objects Animation that does not use a range of motion Visibility and color animation do not use a range of motion because these types of animation represent a change of state not a range of values Using Object Smart Path With Object Smart Path you can easily set the range of motion for an object The following example shows how Object Smart Path works Example Using Object Smart Path to define the range of motion for horizontal slider animation To define a range of motion for a slider object 1 In the Graphics editor create a slider object using a line and a rectangle or copy a slider object from the Sliders graphic library 2 Open the Animation dialog box and click the Horizontal Slider tab 3 In the display select the rectangle in the slider object 4 Inthe Tag box of the Animation dialog box specify a tag name r Sliders Library O X NNN Animation Vertical Slider Tag mem AnimHoriz Tags J J Expression range Horizontal offset Pixels ee At minimum imi at maximum rfo Create an analog
167. eate an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag s value That way you can use the trigger values and 2 When the Value connection s value is 0 the local message display object is cleared 19 Using graphic displays Creating local messages in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 supports local messages in multiple languages When you create local messages they are in the current application language You can export the local messages for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Language switching local messages in RSView ME Station 4 00 For applications that will run in RSView ME Station version 4 00 use the CurrentLanguage expression function to specify message offsets in the local message file In the file divide your messages into sections for each language For information about the CurrentLanguage function see page 23 15 How the local message display graphic object works When you open a graphic display at run time FactoryTalk View reads the value of the Value connection and updates the local message display object based on the value What is displayed m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the display is filled with question marks m The Value connection is rounded to the nearest integer If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file the display is filled with question marks For information about how values a
168. ed them see Chapter 21 For information about setting up global objects see Chapter 25 For examples of how to set up objects see the sample applications that come with FactoryTalk View Studio The Help also provides examples of how to use objects Types of graphic objects The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects Use objects to control your process machines and application FactoryTalk View comes with a complete range of configurable objects such as push buttons list selectors bar graphs and trends Some objects interact with the data source allowing the operator to change or view tag values For example the operator can push a button to set a tag value to 1 causing a programmable controller to start a conveyor belt Other objects are used to control your application For example there are button objects that you can use to change displays and scroll through lists FactoryTalk View also comes with drawing objects that you can use to illustrate your graphic displays The drawing objects include text bitmap images and geometric and freehand shapes 20 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE FactoryTalk View also supports the use of ActiveX objects third party software components that you can use to control processes and display information The ActiveX objects available depend on which third party applications are installed on your development computer For example products such as Mi
169. ee the other possible states For sequential processes the list can alert the operator about what happens next in the process For details see page 21 42 Trend Historical or current numeric tag values plotted against time or displayed in an XY plot where one or more tags values are plotted against another tag s values to show the relationship between them For details see Chapter 28 Time and date display Display the current time and date For details see page 21 55 ActiveX object Data using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags The format of the data displayed depends on the object For details see page 20 21 Drawing object with rotation width height fill color or horizontal or vertical position animation The value of a tag using a pictorial representation of the current value in relation to a range of possible values For example use rotation animation to show the tag value as a needle s position on a dial For color animation assign different colors to represent different values For information about animation see Chapter 22 20 6 20 Using graphic objects Working with lists trends alarm banners and numeric input objects Use this button With this graphic object To do this Pause button Trend Toggle a trend between pausing and automatic scrolling Next pen button Trend Change the vertical axis lab
170. eet or Unicode text file created for translation Therefore numbers 2 through 9 would appear after 10 11 12 and so on To keep your messages in order in the translation file begin the first series of numbers at 11 4 Create French messages for trigger values 21 to 30 5 Create German messages for trigger values 31 to 40 6 Assign this expression to the Value connection in the Information Setup editor If CurrentLanguage en US then Information_messages Else If CurrentLanguage fr FR then Information_messages 10 Else Information_messages 20 23 Using expressions if then else If then else expressions carry out an action conditionally or branch actions depending on the statements in the expression The if then else statements enable the expression to perform different actions in different situations and to repeat activities until a condition changes To build conditional expressions use the relational operators and the logical operators for the statement and values The if then else structure 1s if statement then valuel else value2 If the statement is true then the expression returns value if the statement is false then the expression returns value2 If the result of the statement is a non zero value the statement is true and returns value1 if the result is 0 the statement is false and returns value2 The if then else structure is illustrated here false 23 17 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE
171. el View Plus CE terminals are shipped with font linking turned on For more information about font linking see Help For more information about setting up languages for your application see Chapter 12 Using the Size to fit option If you use the Size to fit option the size of the text object will likely change for different languages Make sure you check all displays containing translated language strings To create a text object 1 Select the Text tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the text and then drag to draw a rectangle 20 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 14 The Text Properties dialog box opens Text Properties x General Common Text Type the text here Font Size Arial fio _ Back color Alignment BB Fore color eee M Size to fit soe IY Word wrap eee fe Insert Yariable z ul Back style Transparent Cancel Apply Help 3 Select text options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 To close the dialog box click OK The text is positioned where you drew the rectangle 5 To create another text object move to a new area in the display and then repeat steps 2 through 4 After you ve set up one text object to look the way you want copy and paste it to create additional text objects with the same formatting Then edit the text of the new objects To edit a text object 1 D
172. eleases the first button and sends a new value to the tag For details see page 21 26 You can also use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a tag Ramp button Increase or decrease the value of a tag by a specified integer or floating point value For example use two ramp buttons together to create a raise lower control For details see page 21 27 Control list selector Select from a list of states for a process or operation The list is highlighted to show the current state and the operator can scroll through the list to select a different state The value assigned to the selected state is written to the tag For details see page 21 47 Piloted control list selector Select from a list of states for a process or operation The list is highlighted to show the current state and the operator or a remote device such as a programmable controller can scroll through the list to select a different state For details see page 21 50 Drawing object with horizontal or vertical slider animation Set the value of a tag by dragging the slider object The pixel position of the slider is translated into a value that is written to the tag If the value of the tag is changed at the data source the position of the slider changes to reflect this For information about animation see Chapter 22 ActiveX object Change tag values using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including bot
173. els for a trend to the scale for the next pen Backspace button Control list selector Move the cursor back to the highlighted item in the list Piloted control list selector End button Lists and trends List move to the bottom item in the list Trend resume trend scrolling and move to the current latest data in the trend Enter button Lists Select the item the cursor is pointing to Alarm list and alarm Acknowledge the currently selected alarm banner Home button Lists and trends List move to the top item in the list Trend pause the trend and move to the earliest data in the trend Move left right buttons Trend Pause the trend and scroll to the left or right Move up down buttons Lists trends and numeric input objects List move up or down one item in the list Trend scroll up or down to display higher or lower values on the vertical scale Numeric input cursor point and numeric input enable button ramp the value up or down Page up down buttons Lists Move up or down one page in the list Acknowledge alarm Alarm list Acknowledge and silence the selected alarm button Alarm banner Alarm status mode Alarm status list Change the type of alarms displayed in the alarm status list from all button alarms to active alarms to past alarms Clear alarm banner Alarm banner Clear the alarm in the alarm banner without removing the alarm from the button alarm log file and alarm lists Diag
174. em is to use the options on the Windows menu For example Tile Horizontal arranges all the open displays with as much of the top part of each display showing as possible Creating a background for your display You can create a background for your graphic display by converting graphic objects to wallpaper When objects are converted to wallpaper they are locked into position and become an unchanging background for the other objects in the display Converting objects that do not need to be animated or updated with tag values can significantly improve the runtime performance of a graphic display Objects that have been converted to wallpaper cannot be selected or edited until you unlock the wallpaper Also animations attached to the wallpaper objects are not in effect However animations are restored when you unlock the wallpaper Similarly any tags or expressions assigned to an object become inactive when the object is converted to wallpaper Connections are restored if you unlock the wallpaper To manage a number of objects easily group the objects and then convert the group to wallpaper To convert objects to wallpaper 1 Select the objects to convert For information about selecting objects see page 20 23 2 On the Edit menu select Wallpaper and then click Convert to Wallpaper For a single object you can right click it and then click Convert to Wallpaper To unlock the wallpaper 1 On the Edit menu select Wallpaper and then
175. ence object 1 Copy an object from a global object display to a standard graphic display 2 To assign unique connections animation or size to the object double click the object to open the Property Panel For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also create reference objects by adding a global object display to the Displays folder All the objects in the new display are reference objects To add a global object display to the Displays folder 1 In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Displays icon 2 Click Add Component Into Application 3 Browse to and select the global object display to add and then click Open The display is copied into the Displays folder and given the file extension gfx All the objects are converted to reference objects 25 Using parameters and global objects To edit a reference object s base object 1 Right click the reference object and then click Edit Base Object 2 The global object display containing the base object opens with the object selected 3 Make your changes to the base object All reference objects linked to the base object are updated To view the changes to the reference object close the display containing the reference object and then reopen it Or toggle the object s LinkSize property on and off Setting up reference objects link properties FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearanc
176. encing 9 8 9 24 9 39 viewing at runtime 17 19 remotely 9 24 ALARM MULTI LINE display 9 6 sorting 9 9 9 40 copying 9 30 testing on the development computer 14 2 editing 9 27 Analog tags 7 1 Alarm Setup editor 9 3 how floating point values are rounded 7 2 exporting to XML E 1 logging values for 26 5 importing XML E 3 monitoring for alarms 9 4 using tags in 6 9 using to generate a range of alarms 9 11 Alarm status list graphic object 20 10 21 60 Animation 22 1 at run time 9 34 checking 22 15 linking buttons to 21 9 copying 22 16 navigating to 21 7 defining range of motion for 22 6 using buttons with 9 35 for global objects 22 17 25 9 Alarm status mode button graphic object for group objects 20 47 22 14 a 20 7 21 16 setting minimum and maximum values for using with alarm status lists 9 36 a 22 6 Alarm triggers 9 4 testing 22 5 and the default language 9 5 using expressions 22 6 data types for 9 11 using Object Smart Path 22 4 22 7 exporting to XML E I using tags and placeholders 22 5 importing XML E 3 viewing in Object Explorer 20 25 Alarms 9 1 Animation dialog box 22 2 acknowledging 9 8 9 19 9 38 Animation types 22 1 remotely 9 19 9 20 9 24 color 22 9 clearing 9 8 9 39 fill 22 12 creating your own display for 9 30 height 22 13 deleting 9 39 horizontal position 22 12 displaying 9 6 horizontal slider 22 14 displaying in the alarm
177. ent kinds of indicators to suit your needs Multistate indicators display the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect different states 21 Setting up graphic objects Symbols display a symbol that changes color to indicate the state of a process or operation This allows the operator to see the status of a process or operation at a glance List indicators display a list of states for a process or operation and highlight the current state Each state is represented by a caption in the list This type of indicator is useful if you want operators to view the current state but also see the other possible states For sequential processes the list can inform the operator about what happens next Setting up multistate indicators The multistate indicator displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image for each state The error state The multistate indicator s error state is displayed at run time when the Indicator connection is unassigned the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator connection value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Value connection does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to V
178. eric variable rather than a string variable String embedded variables use this syntax LS Tag_name SHOWSTAR where L optional indicates it is a literal static string This symbol prevents a tag read If you type a tag placeholder for the Jag_name the value of the placeholder is substituted from the parameter file or global object parameter definition The value cannot contain spaces S indicates it s a string embedded variable optional A minus sign before the indicates that if the string is longer than the fixed number of characters the right most characters will be displayed indicates the number of characters if you select a fixed number of characters type 0 if you don t want to use a fixed number 24 Using embedded variables Tag_name is the tag to display you can also type a literal string or tag placeholder here The string cannot contain spaces SHOWSTAR optional specifies that if the string is longer than the fixed number of characters an asterisk will be displayed to indicate the string is truncated If you use the minus sign the asterisk will be displayed as the first character at the left end of the string Otherwise the asterisk will be displayed as the last character at the right end of the string Examples String embedded variable syntax To display the current value of a string tag called Blower_status with a fixed length of 20 characters you would type this S 20 B
179. es are not supported in FactoryTalk View m Bit Position m 1 BCD 2 BCD 5 BCD 6 BCD 7 BCD 8 BCD BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 BIN8 used with Modbus communications Tags that use these data types are converted to analog HMI tags with the Default data type The Default data type uses floating point values FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE For Bit Position data types use the bitwise expression operators to display data that does not reference supported lengths For more information see the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase To open the KnowledgeBase 1 In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Help menu select Rockwell Software on the Web and then click Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase For information about using bitwise expression operators see page 23 9 Unsupported initial values Device tags in FactoryTalk View do not use initial values Memory tags are converted with their initial values Converting RIO communications You can use Remote I O RIO communications on the Panel View Plus and Panel View Plus CE runtime platforms A RIO communications are not supported for applications that will run on a personal computer However you can test run your RIO applications on the development computer To convert an RIO application from PanelBuilder 1400e to FactoryTalk View 1 Convert the application as described on page A 3 2 Open the RSLinx Enterprise data server and then double click Communication Setup 3 Inth
180. es of animation m color m fill m height horizontal position m horizontal slider m rotation m vertical position m vertical slider m visibility 22 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 2 width The Objects 5 Screen Demo sample application contains many examples of animation In particular see the graphic displays called Animation I and Animation II Which objects can have which types of animation This table summarizes which types of objects support which types of animation For information about the different types of graphic objects see page 20 1 These objects Support these types of animation Drawing objects except images panels and All types rounded rectangles Rounded rectangles All types except rotation All other objects Visibility You can also attach animation to groups of drawing objects For more information see page 22 14 You can attach as many types of animation to a drawing object except images and panels as you like For example apply width height horizontal position and vertical position animation to an object to give it the appearance of moving into or out of the display as it shrinks and grows Using the Animation dialog box To attach animation use the Animation dialog box To open the Animation dialog box do one of the following m Select an object and then on the View menu click Animation m Select an object and then on the Animat
181. es of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object For information about creating base objects see page 25 6 The copies of the object are called reference objects and they have the same properties as the original base object If desired you can assign unique animation to the reference object For information about creating reference objects see page 25 8 The LinkAnimation property determines whether the reference object uses the base object s animation To set up animation for a reference object 1 Double click the reference object to open the Property Panel 2 Select the LinkAnimation property setting to use Do not link allows you to set up separate animation for the reference object Link with expressions the reference object uses the animation and tags or expressions assigned to the base object Link without expressions allows you to use only the types of animation set up for the base object but assign different tags or expressions to the reference object 3 If you selected Do not link or Link without expressions set up animation for the object using the methods described in this chapter For more information about setting up link properties and working with reference objects see page 25 9 22 17 923 Using expressions This chapter describes m the types of expression components m using the Expression editor m which ed
182. es system tags System tags are preconfigured HMI tags created by FactoryTalk View System tags are read only Display them as needed in your application Alarms The following tag contains the time and date when the status of alarms was last reset The date uses the long date format Tag name Type Function system AlarmReset String Contains the date and time of the DateAndTimeString last alarm reset For information about resetting alarms see page 9 9 Graphics The following HMI tags can be used to make graphic objects appear as though they are blinking on and off Tag name Type Function system BlinkFast Digital Toggles on and off every 100 ms 10 times per second system BlinkSlow Digital Toggles on and off every 500 ms twice per second A more efficient way to make graphic objects blink is to use the blinking color option in color animation For details see page 22 9 Also many objects have a Blink property that you can set up For information about specific objects see Help C 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Time These HMI tags record time and date information in various formats Tag Name Type Provides this data Read or write system Date String System date Read only system DateAndTime Analog Number of seconds elapsed Read only Integer since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time system DateAndTime String Complete date and time Read only
183. etween numeric values It s easier for the operator to see that one graph is at a lower level than the other or that one s fill is blue and the other s is yellow than it is to subtract one numeric value from another Thresholds change a bar graph s fill color As it fills a bar graph can change its fill color to help an operator recognize abnormal conditions The change in color happens when the tag or expression value crosses a threshold you set up for the graph For example m Ifthe temperature of an oven is lower than required for a recipe the bar graph can show the temperature in blue 21 43 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 44 m Ifthe temperature is in the correct range for the recipe the bar graph can show the temperature in green m If the temperature is higher than the recipe allows the bar graph can show the temperature in red If you want to use a different fill color on a bar graph to show abnormal conditions make sure enough of the new fill color is visible when the abnormal condition occurs that the operator can see the condition Use bar graphs with scales to show limits Unlike gauges bar graphs do not have integrated scales You can show values on a bar graph using a scale graphic object and text Scales consist of major ticks represented by long lines and minor ticks represented by short lines To indicate the values of major or minor ticks use text objects Gauges make it eas
184. f there is no data for a pen or if the data is outside the vertical axis range the pen does not appear in the chart Pen icons Pen icons appear at the right edge of the chart at run time if you choose to display them The icon s position indicates the pen s most recent recorded value from the value table even if the trend is paused or if the most recent value has not been plotted yet Pen markers Pen markers are symbols that indicate data points If data is plotted frequently the markers might not appear as distinct separate symbols For example see the lowest pen in the illustration on page 28 5 Chart types Standard vs XY Plots You can create a standard chart which plots tag values against time or an XY Plot chart which plots one or more tag s values against another s This illustration shows what an XY Plot chart could look like Time period 1 12 56 Ph 1 14 56 PM Sunday December 31 2000 Notice that the horizontal axis labels display the range for the specified x axis pen The time period covered by the chart is at the upper left 28 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 28 8 Isolated graphing For charts with multiple pens you can allow the pen values to overlap or you can isolate each pen in its own horizontal band on the chart This is an example of isolated graphing with a 10 buffer between each pen s band Sunday December 51 2000 L 1 02 17 Phi 1 02 H
185. f tracking plant activity as it is happening You can m plot data for as many as eight tags or expressions on one trend m create a trend that is part of a graphic display or acts as the entire graphic display m plot data over time or plot one variable against another in an XY Plot chart to show the relationship between them m display isolated or non isolated graphs Isolated graphing places each pen in a separate band of the chart With non isolated graphing pen values can overlap m create buttons to allow the operator to pause scroll and print the trend data 28 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 28 2 The illustration below shows a trend that has been added to a graphic display You can view the Kiln Status display by opening the Malthouse sample application Pe Kiln Status Bakerp Display Air On Temp H NNN deg F HON deg F Temp H NNNH deg F Monday March 18 2002 12 51 44 PRM Air Of Blue Air On Green Fe show Trand Graph Current versus historical data The trend graphic object 12 54 44 PM Return Fg The data displayed in a trend can come from two sources For current values data comes from the value table as it is collected The value table is a record of the most recent values collected from the data source and is stored in temporary memory while the application is running For historical values data comes from a data log model s log file if a mo
186. file lists the location of the file Importing graphics XML files You can import a single graphic or global object display XML file at a time or import multiple displays You can also choose whether to import new objects or update existing objects To import multiple displays specify the names of the displays in the file BatchImport_Application name xml FactoryTalk View creates this file when you export multiple displays For details see page H 1 To import display information from an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Displays or Global Objects editor 2 Click Import and Export The Graphics Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For more information about using the Graphics Import Export Wizard see Help Graphics XML file structure The graphic display or global object display XML file is a FactoryTalk View XML document that describes the objects and settings for a display The root element of the XML document is called gfx It represents the display An XML document can contain only one root element All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE In an XML document the start of an element is marked lt element name gt The end is marked lt element name gt If the element contains no subelements the end can be marked gt For example lt caption fontFamily Arial fontSize 8
187. for the selected graphic displays in the location you specify FactoryTalk View also creates a file called BatchImport_Application name xml in the same location You can use this file to import multiple displays at the same time To import a different set of displays than you exported edit the list of display names in the BatchImport_Application name xmil file Editing XML files We recommend that you use Notepad to edit your XML files If you do not want to change a property you don t need to include it in the XML file When you import the file if you select the option Create new objects in the display properties that are not listed in the file are set to their default values If you select the option Update existing objects on the display only properties that are listed in the file are updated with imported information If you include attributes for an object whose name does not match one of those in the graphic display the attributes for that object are not imported Attributes for all other objects in the file whose names do match the ones in the graphic display are imported Saving XML files in Notepad Save XML files created or edited in Notepad using either UTF 8 or UTF 16 file format Notepad s Unicode file type corresponds to UTF 16 file format For files containing strings in English or other Latin based languages UTF 8 is recommended to reduce the size of the XML file For other languages such as Chinese Jap
188. fthe temperature is higher than the recipe allows the gauge can show the temperature in red Some people are color blind to red and green so don t rely on color alone to establish meaning Setting up bar graphs Use bar graphs to represent numeric values by filling and emptying the object as the values rise and fall To set up a bar graph 1 Double click the bar graph Bar Graph Properties x General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 7 Border uses back color oO Back color Back style Solid BB Border color E Fill color Bar graph settings Minimum value Maximum value Fill direction o fioo Bottom to Top Thresholds Number of thresholds Threshold type 0 Value Threshold 1 value Bo _ Fill color T Blink Threshold 2 value 7s E Fill color Blink Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the bar graph looks like at run time m Inthe Common tab specify the bar graph s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the bar graph receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 21 45 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up gauges The gauge graphic
189. g PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications To convert a PanelBuilder application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open 1 On the File menu click New Application or click the New Application tool L Eaa If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close New Application the application that is currently open Click Yes 2 Follow steps 2 through 6 in the previous procedure Equivalent graphic objects This section describes graphic objects that are equivalent in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View but have different names in the two products Is converted to this FactoryTalk View This PanelBuilder object object Notes Numeric Entry Keypad Enable Numeric input enable button Button Numeric Entry Cursor Point Numeric input enable button Increment Decrement Entry Button Numeric input enable button The numeric input enable button is set up to work as a ramp button using the Fine Step value The Coarse Step value is not converted ASCII Entry Keypad Enable button String input enable button The Show Current String on ASCII Scratchpad setting is not converted The pop up scratchpad or keyboard is always blank when opened ASCII Entry Cursor Point String input enable button The Show Current String on ASCII Scratchpad setting is not converted The pop up scratchpad or keyboard is always blank when opened Message Display Multistate indicator Numeric Data Display
190. g inward to increase roundedness or outward to decrease roundedness te 4 To finish drawing click the object 5 To change how the object looks click Properties on the context menu or double click the object to open its Properties dialog box 6 Select rounded rectangle or square options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 7 To close the dialog box click OK For information about using the Rounded Rectangle tool to reshape the rounded rectangle see page 20 46 Using wmf and dxf files Windows metafiles wmf and AutoCAD dxf files are converted to drawing objects such as lines ellipses and polygons when you import them You can edit the drawing objects the same way you edit drawing objects that you create in FactoryTalk View Depending on the complexity of the metafile or AutoCAD file the converted image could consist of 500 or more drawing objects This would lead to long display load times In this ETRL ActiveX Control tool 20 Using graphic objects case it would be better to covert the wmf or dxf file to a bitmap and then display the bitmap in an image object To place a wmf or dxf file in a display 1 On the Objects menu click Import 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the file and then drag to draw a rectangle 3 In the Files of type box select the type of file to import 4 Navigate to the directory where the file is stored and then click
191. g objects to send button presses to a 21 7 21 9 using function keys with 21 5 using with alarm banners 20 7 20 8 using with alarm history and diagnostics messages 20 8 using with lists 20 7 using with numeric input objects 20 7 20 8 using with trends 20 7 20 8 28 11 Button presses repeating 21 12 sending to graphic objects 21 7 21 9 C Caches for data servers synchronizing 5 5 Change Password window 17 5 Circle graphic object 20 2 20 17 Clear alarm banner button graphic object 9 8 20 7 21 16 using with alarm banners 9 36 Clear alarm history button graphic object a 20 8 21 17 clearing alarms with 9 8 resetting alarms with 9 9 silencing alarms with 9 9 using to delete the alarm log file 9 10 using with alarm lists 9 36 Close display button graphic object 20 4 21 36 and alarms 9 31 and diagnostics messages 10 11 and information messages 27 6 27 7 using to navigate 13 3 13 6 Color blinking C 1 for graphic objects 20 32 in graphic displays animating 22 9 in trends 28 9 Color animation 20 6 22 9 at run time 17 18 Communication drivers setting up at run time for transfer to PanelView Plus 16 3 for transfer to Panel View Plus CE 16 3 on personal computers 15 9 setting up in RSLinx Enterprise atrun time 15 9 for transfer to PanelView Plus 16 5 for transfer to Panel View Plus CE 16 5 Communications displaying errors at run time 17 20 set
192. ges color as the object s fill level increases This example uses a tag called Hopper1 FlourLevel The tag has a range of 1 to 100 When the flour level reaches 80 the rectangle blinks between gray and yellow to warn the operator that the hopper is nearly full When the flour level reaches 95 the rectangle blinks between gray and red You could use a bar graph object without animation to achieve a similar result 1 Double click the rectangle to open the Polygon Properties dialog box Assign these properties to the rectangle m Inthe Back style box select Solid m For the Fore color and Back color select gray 22 Animating graphic objects Click OK to close the Polygon Properties dialog box With the rectangle selected open the Animation dialog box and then click the Fill tab Attach fill animation as follows m Inthe Expression box type Hopper FlourLevel this is the tag that monitors the fill level m For Fill Direction click Up Click the Color tab and then attach color animation as follows m Inthe Expression box type Hopper FlourLevel the same tag that was used in the Fill tab Set up the color for the normal state m In the list box click A In the Value box leave the value as 0 For foreground and background colors click Solid m For each click the color box and then click gray the same gray used for the rectangle Set up the color for the first warning m In the list box click B
193. graph To set up a scale 1 Double click the scale Scale Properties x General Common Appearance Border style Border width i eadar len 2 BB Back color Line style Line width BB Border color Sold z fi BB Fore color Back style Blink Transparent Scale Setup C Up Tick direction C Left Right C Down Major ticks 3 x Minor ticks 1 Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the scale looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the scale s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up control list selectors Control list selectors allow an operator to scroll through a list of states for a process and select one of the states A highlight in the list shows the current state A control list selector can show several states at the same time but only one state can be selected at a time As the operator scrolls through the list each successive state is selected 21 47 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 48 automatically If you want the operator to confirm the selection of a particular state before the state s value is written to the programmable controller create an enter button on the same display as the control list selector and select the Write on enter option
194. h HMI and data server tags When the object s property value changes the new value is written to the associated tag For details see page 20 21 20 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Displaying processes and values graphically Use this graphic object To display this Bar graph Numeric values in bar graph format The bar graph increases or decreases in size to show the changing value For details see page 21 45 Gauge Numeric values in dial format The gauge s needle moves around the dial to show the changing value For details see page 21 46 Scale A static indication of the range of values for a bar graph For details see page 21 47 Multistate indicator The state of a process on a panel that changes its color image or caption to indicate the current state Each state is set up to correspond to a numeric tag value For details see page 21 39 Symbol The state of a process using a monochrome image that changes color to indicate the current state Each state corresponds to a numeric tag value This object is useful for showing the state of a process or operation at a glance For details see page 21 40 List indicator The state of a process using a list of possible states with the current state highlighted Each state is represented by a caption in the list and corresponds to a numeric tag value This indicator is useful if you want to view the current state but also want to s
195. h tab m Inthe General tab specify what the momentary push button looks like at run time and what type of action the button performs m In the States tab specify what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up maintained push buttons Use the maintained push button to change a setting in a machine or process Maintained push buttons are not useful for starting or stopping a machine or process When pressed the first time the maintained push button changes a tag to one value When pressed and released a second time the button changes the tag to another value 21 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 22 The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up The error state is also displayed when the display containing the maintained push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a maintained p
196. haking only works if the Write on enter check box is selected in the General tab 21 Setting up graphic objects For more information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 To set up a control list selector 1 Double click the control list selector Control List Selector Properties x General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset o Back color BB Border color Pattern style C Pattem color None C Selection back color BB Selection fore color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial Apo B z u wod C Character Number of states eo a Buttons IV Write on enter MV Key navigation MV Wrap around Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether to write out a value when the operator presses the Enter key whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top m In the States tab set up the value and caption for each state The value defines the control list selector s action by changing the Value connection to the value you specify when the selected state is in effect For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Timing tab set
197. he RecipePlus table Write tag values from the selected data set to the data source Write tag values from the data source to the selected data set or to a new data set Save data set values from the table to a recipe file Rename or delete recipe units For details see page 29 3 RecipePlus selector Select the recipe unit to display download from write to rename or delete For details see page 29 2 RecipePlus table Display and compare recipe data set values and tag values Edit data set values For details see page 29 2 ActiveX object Enter or display data using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags The format of the data entered or displayed depends on the object For details see page 20 21 20 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 10 Displaying alarms and messages Use this graphic object Alarm list To display this Multiple alarm messages including the time the alarms are triggered and acknowledged For details see page 9 32 Alarm banner A single unacknowledged alarm message For details see page 9 33 Alarm status list The status of alarms including how many times an alarm has been triggered and how long it has been active For details see page 9 34 Diagnostics list Messages about system activity such as tag reads tag writes and communications errors For details see page 10 11
198. he new values in the table overwrite existing data set values if any for the unit in the recipe file Delete delete the recipe unit selected in the RecipePlus selector object Rename rename the recipe unit selected in the RecipePlus selector object The illustration below shows a graphic library display that contains a RecipePlus selector RecipePlus buttons and a RecipePlus table The display also contains key buttons for 29 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE working with the selector and table a bar graph that shows the percentage complete of the recipe operation and a string display that shows the status of the recipe operation Fe RecipePlus_Components Condiments Library Recipe Selection Recipe Buttons Download unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit rec ipe rec ipe re unt unit unit unit Upeaa anae cae rec ipe rec ipe re unit unit unit unit pe recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit pan ecipe recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit Status ac recipe recipe re recipe recipe re Upload recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit e unit unit unit unit unit unit unit unit 5 Delete recipe recipe re recipe recipe re recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit Rename ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 ingredient 123456 Number forma
199. he time and date when the embedded variable is displayed at run time Time and date formats Time and date embedded variables use the time and date formats for the current application language For example if you specify the short date format at run time the display uses the short date format that the application language uses For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 95 Using parameters and global objects This chapter describes m using tag placeholders and parameter files m creating tag placeholders m creating parameter files m using global objects m creating global object displays and base objects m creating setting up and deleting reference objects m using global object parameters m adding process faceplates that connect to Logix5000 processors The topics in this chapter describe features of FactoryTalk View Studio that can help you set up your applications more quickly by reusing similar groups of objects and graphic displays m Tag placeholders and parameter files allow you to use the same graphic display with different sets of tags Global objects allow you to use multiple instances of the same graphic object and make changes to all of the objects at once Global object parameters allow you to assign different sets of tags to different copies of the object without breaking the link to the base object thus preserving the ability to update all copies of the object at once m P
200. he version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the file For G 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE G 2 example if the application will run on a terminal that uses RS View ME Station version 3 20 you can specify that version for the mer file If the application contains features that are not supported by the version you select FactoryTalk View displays a validation report that lists the unsupported features The runtime application file is not created You must remove or turn off the unsupported features before you can create the runtime application file For information about creating runtime application files see Chapter 14 The remainder of this appendix lists the features that are not supported in previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station The tables also show how to remove or replace the unsupported features Features that are not supported in version 4 00 or earlier These version 5 00 features are not supported in version 4 00 of RS View ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Delete action assigned to a RecipePlus button graphic object Do this Delete the button or change the action to Download Upload Upload and Create Restore or Save Rename action assigned to a RecipePlus button graphic object Delete the button or change the action to Download Upload Upload and Create
201. hic objects see Chapter 20 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool In the Component name box type a name for the display and then click OK The display is added to the list in the Displays folder The display is created as a Replace display by default but you can change it to an On Top display in the Display Settings dialog box For more information about display types see page 19 12 To open a graphic display m Inthe Graphics folder open the Displays folder and then double click the display name or right click the display name and then click Open You can also drag and drop the display from the Explorer window to an empty area in the FactoryTalk View Studio workspace 19 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 4 Objects toolbar Bubuoat neat gt vset de Oe euesons Display area Object explorer Diagnostics List Status bar gt Parim wane n a Mooaione ss el a This example shows a graphic display with the Explorer window closed Standard toolbar Ee eee mesper Graphics toolbar p seam 2eBQQnces yOA 2000 vo ooo eR vos onsamnBRDE NEN Bahu tat AT Biran bhard remih bo be raidhe bi v egal ep Parei Pee mbe n Punbbuneces inpet me EN o n D wu ORM DE ix Topa Lorg ar apa Deira dhe pocorn ol he doisidhe or dep baH 4 i a P roperty Panel The Graphics editor has special items on the View and Edit menus and extra too
202. his appendix describes the ODBC database format or schema for messages from FactoryTalk Diagnostics The target table of the ODBC database to which you are sending messages must use the format shown in this appendix The option of logging FactoryTalk Diagnostics messages to an ODBC database is available for personal computers only For information about setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics see Chapter 10 FactoryTalk Diagnostics log table FactoryTalk Diagnostics log data in ODBC format uses one table This column Contains SQL data type Length TimeStmp The time and date data was logged in coordinated SQL_TIMESTAMP Driver universal time format Encoded as a date variant dependent MessageText Message to be logged SQL_VARCHAR or 254 SQL_CHAR Audience A number representing the message audience SQL_SMALLINT or 1 0 for Operator SQL_INTEGER 1 for Engineer 2 for Developer 3 for Secure Severity A number representing the severity of the SQL_SMALLINT or l diagnostics message SQL_INTEGER 0 for Error 1 for Warning 2 for Information 3 for Audit Area The FactoryTalk path to the area in which the SQL_VARCHAR or 80 activity occurred Used for Factory Talk View Site SQL_CHAR Edition only Location The name of the computer where the message was SQL_VARCHAR or 15 generated SQL_CHAR D 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This column Contains SQL data type Length UserID The name of the user i
203. ic display in the Displays folder and then add the display to the Libraries folder To create a graphic library 1 In the Graphics folder right click Libraries and then click New 2 Create the objects you want to put in the library For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 3 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool 4 Inthe Component name box type a name for the library and then click OK The library is added to the list in the Libraries folder You can also create a graphic display and then use Add Component Into Application to add the display to the Libraries folder 19 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 16 To add a graphic display to the library l 2 gt 5 Create the graphic display In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Libraries icon Click Add Component Into Application In the dialog box navigate to the Gfx folder and then click the gfx file for the display to use The Gfx folder is located in Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Windows 2000 or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projectsA pplication Name Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 where Application Name is the name of your application Click Open The display is copied into the Libraries folder Using libraries as displays in your application
204. icator looks like at run time and the number of states for the indicator m Inthe States tab specify how the indicator s appearance changes when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Common tab specify the indicator s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the indicator receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK How to use bar graphs gauges and scales Bar graphs and gauges display graphical representations of numeric values The scale is used with bar graphs to indicate the range of values for the bar graph Bar graphs make it easy to compare values Bar graphs display numeric values in bar graph format They are useful for allowing comparisons between multiple values or for representing the fill levels of tanks for which a reading on a vertical scale is appropriate For example one bar graph can show the required level of a tank and a second bar graph can show the actual level of the tank The first graph can change to represent the required level for a particular application and the second graph changes as the actual level in the tank rises or drops Bar graphs are more useful than numeric displays when it s important for the operator to analyze the relationships b
205. ick again Handles appear The handles show the individual object selected within the group group A hatched border appears This border indicates that this is a group To select an individual object or a group in the group click it You can also use the Object Explorer to select objects within the group The status bar and Object Explorer indicate which object or group is selected Make your changes to the object You can change the selected object s shape size or position or use the object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel to edit the object s properties If desired create new objects inside the hatched border To stop editing click outside the group Arranging objects You can arrange objects or groups of objects in a number of ways You can layer objects by moving them in front of or behind other objects align objects with each other and with the grid space objects horizontally or vertically flip drawing objects horizontally or vertically rotate drawing objects lock objects into position Layering objects You can layer objects or groups of objects on top of each other Objects are layered in the order they are created with the most recently created object on top Change the layer order with Send to Back and Bring to Front Send to Back moves the selected object to the bottom layer Bring to Front moves the selected object to the top layer 20 49 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE
206. ick the Global Objects icon 2 Click Add Component Into Application 3 Browse to and select the display or library to add and then click Open 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 8 The display is copied into the Global Objects folder and given the file extension ggfx Any ActiveX objects are deleted All other objects are converted to base objects If you delete remove or rename a global object display you break the links between the base objects in the display and their reference objects For more information about breaking links see Help Creating reference objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object The copies of the base object are called reference objects You can copy or drag base objects into standard graphic displays Each copied object becomes a reference object You can also copy drag and duplicate reference objects that you have already created to create more copies of the base object Base objects can be group objects This provides powerful template capabilities When you add or remove objects from the base object group all the reference objects are automatically updated If desired you can assign unique connections animation and size to the reference object To create a refer
207. icking the right mouse button This is often quicker than moving the mouse up to the menus at the top of the screen The items on the menu depend on the cursor s location For example when you right click an object the menu contains the most common actions you can perform on that object 19 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 6 When you right click an object start Conveyor Key Assignments Arrange d Animation d Convert to Wallpaper a MENU OPENS Tag Substitution Itcontains menu Property Panel items for Object Explorer working with the Cut Selected object Copy Delete Duplicate Global Object Defaults Edit Base Object Break Link 19 Using graphic displays Using the toolbars The toolbars provide another convenient way to perform an action quickly You can customize your workspace by dragging the toolbars to any location on the screen You can also dock them to the inside edges of the FactoryTalk View Studio workspace Click the Close button to close the toolbar Click the grab bars and drag to undock a docked toolbar Click the title bar and drag to move a floating undocked toolbar mOSOs4e 5 r Untitled Display Foreground Color 88 MMS 7 YS SN IN ll Se CE 88 To display a toolbar m On the View menu select Toolbars and then click the toolbar to display The menu displays a check mark beside the toolbars that are alre
208. ight color Rectangle gt Blink Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio T Key navigation Take focus on press Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the button using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the operator can press the button to give it focus m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe String tab specify the pop up to open and the number of characters to accept m Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up goto display buttons Use the goto display button to open a graphic display You can create as many goto display buttons as you need but each button opens a single display only 21 35 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 36 For more information about using goto display buttons see page 13 4
209. ile is used when the display opens When you open the display the tags specified in the parameter file replace the tag placeholders Parameters can replace any portion of a tag address For example you can use parameters to replace folder names Using the Parameters editor Use the Parameters editor to create one or more files of tag placeholder replacements Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple parameter files at the same time 29 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 4 Particulate Pumphouse Parameters l Parameter File Created 2002708731 Parameter files are used with graphic displays to specify the tags a display l uses at runtime You assign parameter files to displays in the Startup editor and in the dialog box for configuring goto display buttons and display list selectors l Syntax replacement tagname Example l 23 A_COLOR I 23 in any expression in a graphic would be replaced by the tag A_COLOR 1 Data_logging Particulate_input 2 Data_logging Particulate_flow 3 Data_logging Particulate_output For details about using the Parameters editor see Help To open the Help press F1 on your keyboard Example Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders This example shows how to use a graphic display called Canning Overview with two sets of tags one for canning corn and one for canning peas The Canning Overview display i
210. in the Connections tab of the Properties dialog box For information about m using the Tag Browser see page 6 6 m using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 m using the Property Panel see page 20 29 20 37 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 38 Using expressions to manipulate tag values Many of the connections to which you can assign a tag also permit the use of expressions to perform logical or mathematical calculations on tag values If you assign an expression FactoryTalk View monitors the expression value rather than the original tag value For example your machine might send values to the data source in the form of temperature in degrees Celsius You could use an expression to convert the value to degrees Fahrenheit and then monitor the expression result rather than the original tag value If you can assign an expression a Browse button is present in the Exprn column in the Connections tab Homentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections Named ooo Tag Expression Tag Expin Type the expression here Or Click the button to open the Expression editor To specify an expression do one of the following m Inthe Tag Expression column type the expression m Inthe Exprn column click the Browse button and then create an expression in the Expression editor Use this method if you want to check the expression syntax or to use multiple lines for the ex
211. ing point to the end point To draw horizontal or vertical lines hold down Ctrl while you drag the mouse 3 To change how the line looks right click the line and then click Properties on the context menu The Line Properties dialog box opens 4 Select line options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 5 To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polyline tool to convert the line into a polyline For more information see page 20 45 Creating polygons and polylines A polyline is a series of connected line segments A polygon is a multi sided object with three or more sides For example use the polygon shape if you want to create triangles Polyline Transparent gt polygon Solid pohyon To create a polygon or polyline 1 Select the Polygon or Polyline tool 20 18 A P olygon tool Ag P olyline tool L Rectangle tool 20 Using graphic objects 2 Click and drag to create the first segment of the object Release the mouse button To draw horizontal or vertical lines hold down Ctrl while you drag aol 3 Move the mouse to where you want the next segment to end and then click Repeat this step until you have completed the object as RAOR 4 To finish drawing double click an empty area of the display or click the Select tool 5 To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box 6 Select polygon or polyline options
212. ing to graphic objects 21 7 Interlocked push button graphic object 20 5 21 26 at run time 17 16 ISA symbols 19 20 Isolated graphing in trends 28 8 K KEPServerEnterprise array tag syntax 9 17 Keyboard button symbols 19 21 Keyboard navigation 21 7 L Language function in expressions 23 15 Language strings exporting for translation 12 6 importing 12 13 translating in Excel 12 9 translating in Unicode 12 9 Language switch button graphic object 12 3 20 4 21 17 placing in displays 13 3 planning 3 5 Language switching 12 1 See also Languages setting up 12 3 setting up Windows for 12 4 Languages adding 12 5 to libraries 19 17 choosing fonts for 20 13 default 12 2 displaying current language 23 15 planning 3 5 display navigation 13 3 RFC1766 names F 1 l 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE I 12 setting up messages alarm 9 5 9 17 for RSView ME Station 4 00 23 16 information 27 5 local 19 29 testing 14 2 Latched push button graphic object 20 4 21 23 atrun time 17 16 Least Significant Bit trigger type 9 13 Libraries See Graphic libraries License viewing maximum allowable graphic displays 4 18 Line graphic object 20 2 20 18 Link properties for reference objects 25 9 List indicator graphic object 20 6 21 42 at run time 17 18 Local message display graphic object 19 27 20 10 21 53 at run time 17 19 19 29
213. ion in the PanelBuilder Tag Editor locate any tags whose names contain dashes and duplicate the tags Then rename the tags without the dash or replace the dash with an underscore _ Once the tags have been renamed use the Tag Search feature to find the graphic objects using the original tag names and edit the objects to replace the old tag names with the new ones You can convert the PanelBuilder application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio or once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications To convert a PanelBuilder application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio 1 Open FactoryTalk View Studio New Open Machine Edition Application New Existing Application name Description Language 2 In the New tab in the Application name box type a name for your converted application up to 32 characters long 3 If desired type a description of the application If the PanelBuilder application contains an Application Description the Application Description will overwrite the description you type here You can add or change the description later as described on page 4 17 4 Specify the last language that was used to edit the application This will be used for the converted application You can only import one language for your application even if the original application uses multiple languages The imported language will be the last langu
214. ion about using a different message file see page 27 8 Creating information messages in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 supports information messages in multiple languages When you create information messages they are in the current application language You can export the information messages for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Language switching information messages in RSView ME Station 4 00 For applications that will run in RSView ME Station version 4 00 use the CurrentLanguage expression function to specify message offsets in the information message file In the file divide your messages into sections for each language For information about the CurrentLanguage function see page 23 15 27 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 27 6 The INFORMATION display FactoryTalk View comes with an information message graphic display called INFORMATION It contains an information message display graphic object and buttons for acknowledging the displayed message and closing the display By default the INFORMATION graphic display opens automatically at run time when an information message is generated FS INFORMATION Condiments Display Ack Close F1 F2 Information Message Display Information message display graphic object Buttons You can use the INFORMATION display as is or modify the display For example you can chang
215. ion fore color Text Font Size Arial fo Bl z ul Other M Key navigation Wrap around Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the list looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the list using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top Inthe Common tab specify the diagnostics list s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up information message displays The information message display graphic object gives the operator runtime messages about information that requires immediate attention FactoryTalk View comes with a default graphic display called INFORMATION that contains an information message display object You can use the display and object as is customize them or create your own For more information about using information message displays see page 27 7 To set up an information message display 1 Double click the information message display 21 63 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 64 General Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset fa Back color Back style Pattern style Border color Soid i tsi None _ Pattem color _ Fore color
216. ion menu click an animation type Animation types that are not supported for the selected object are unavailable m Right click an object select Animation and then click an animation type Animation types that are not supported for the selected object are unavailable 22 Animating graphic objects View menu Animation menu View Objects Arange Animation Apr Animation Application Tools wv Status Bar Visibility Workbook Mode Color E Explorer Window Fill Diagnostics List Horizontal Position Toolbars d Vertical Position Width V Edit Display P Height Test Display l Rotation Show Displays in Grayscale Horizontal Slider Show Grid Vertical Slider Snap On Grid Settings oom In oom Cut Cancel zoom Property Panel Object Explorer Animation 22 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 4 About the Animation dialog box The Animation dialog box is a floating dialog box which means you can keep it open all the time and move it around the screen While it s open you can select other objects and open other dialog boxes Animation tabs Expression box Animation Horizggtal Postion Vertical Postion Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider Touch OLE Vert v Hotation width Expression Tank_ pressure Tags E Expression Expression range Rotation Degrees C Use tag s min and mas property values At minimum I a Al maximum JER Use c
217. ions Size Position Height width Top Left pis o ao o fe ft MV Visible Cancel Help For details about the options in the Common tab see Help Tips for setting up objects with states The graphic objects that have states have a States tab in their Properties dialog box 21 Setting up graphic objects Momentary Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Select state General Value Pattern style State E Back color None Error BB Border color T Blink _ Pattern color Caption E Insert Variable Font Size Arial fio B Fa U L Caption color Alignment Caption back style BB Caption back color C C Transparent l Caption blink Cer Vv Word wrap eee Image settings Image Image back style a Bi Transparent O Image color Alignment Copy O Image back color eee Image blink scoe Image scaled eee Cancel Help For details about the options in the States tab see Help Copying and pasting properties from one state to another Often you ll want most of the properties to be the same from state to state with only one or two settings changing to distinguish the different states To simplify setting up states when many of the properties are the same you can copy and paste settings from one state to another For details see Help Adding and removing states Some graphic objects have a configurable number of states For these objects you
218. is used unless specifically discussing a programmable controller Summary of steps Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder applications l 2 Convert the application file as described in the next section Specify additional project settings as described on page 4 11 For example if you want the application to have a border around its graphic displays or to use a title bar you can specify these options in the Project Settings editor If you select Convert to new window size check the position of the graphic objects in each display Set up communications and edit tags that don t convert directly For more information see page B 7 Set up graphic object features that don t convert directly For more information see page B 10 Converting PanelBuilder application files Follow these steps to convert a PanelBuilder application file with the extension pba or _pva to an FactoryTalk View application file with the extension med The original PanelBuilder application file is not modified by the conversion Steps to take in PanelBuilder before you convert the application l Semicolons in tag addresses are supported in PanelBuilder but not in FactoryTalk View Studio Before importing the PanelBuilder application in the PanelBuilder Tag Editor change the semicolons to colons Dashes in tag names are supported in PanelBuilder but not in FactoryTalk View Studio Before importing the PanelBuilder applicat
219. isplay specify its type background color and runtime behavior in the Display Settings dialog box You can specify and edit the display settings at any time while you work on your display Specifying display settings To specify display settings m On the Edit menu click Display Settings or right click an empty area of the display and then click Display Settings 19 11 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 12 Set up how the display looks Setup how the display works at run time Display Settings Te E Display Type Size t Replace f Use Curent Size OnTop i Specify Size in Pixels Cannot Be Replaced Display Humber Position Security Code E Title Bar Background Color Disable Initial Input Focus Masimum Tag Update Aate 0 5 k seconds Cancel Help For details about the options in the Display Settings dialog box see Help About display types Replace displays Replace is the default display type Replace displays are full sized displays They use the project window size specified in the Project Settings editor For more information about the project window size see page 4 11 At run time you can have only one Replace display open at a time When the operator opens a Replace display this is what happens The Replace display that was open closes On Top displays that do not use the Cannot Be Replaced option are closed The new Replace disp
220. ist is lowering the pallet 5 The hoist is finished rising Save the message file with the name Hoist status 3 Inthe Graphics editor create a local message display object In the object s Properties dialog box assign the Hoist_Status tag to the Value connection and select the Hoist status message file At run time when the operator views the graphic display containing the local message display object the status of the hoist is displayed Local messages and trigger values Create messages associated with each tag value that you want to inform the operator about Assign each message a trigger value and set up the data source to send the trigger value to the Value connection You can use both HMI and data server tags The trigger value can be any non zero integer value positive or negative Trigger values do not need to be contiguous but they must be unique for each message For example you could use trigger values of 1 2 and 3 or values of 10 20 and 30 If you use an analog tag or an expression you can use any non zero integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 Trigger values cannot be 0 Digital tags have two possible values 0 and 1 Therefore if you use a digital tag you can only use the value to trigger a message If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different messages cr
221. itors use expressions m formatting expressions m using tag names and tag placeholders with expressions m using constants m using operators m using math security and language functions m using if then else logic in expressions m the evaluation order of operators m using write expressions About expressions Sometimes the data you gather from devices is meaningful only when you m compare it to other values combine it with other values m create a cause effect relationship with other values Expressions allow you to create mathematical or logical combinations of data that return more meaningful values Depending on the components used in the expression the value returned can be in the form of a numeric value a true false value or a text string Expressions that result in floating point values If an expression results in a floating point value but an integer value is required the floating point value is rounded For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 23 1 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 2 Expression components Expressions can be built from m tag values m tag placeholders constants m arithmetic relational logical and bitwise operators m mathematical and security functions m if then else logic Tags arithmetic operators bitwise operators and mathematical functions such as SQRT square root return numeric values Relational and logical oper
222. ject moves horizontally based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum pixel offset Horizontal position animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up horizontal position animation see Help Setting up vertical position animation With vertical position animation an object moves vertically based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For 22 Animating graphic objects example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum offset Vertical position animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up vertical position animation see Help Setting up width animation With width animation an object s width changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object s width will be halfway between its minimum and maximum percentage Width animation is available for all drawing o
223. ject or title bar that uses an embedded variable is open the value of the embedded variable is updated whenever a new tag value is read from the data source For time and date embedded variables the time and date are updated as the system time and date change 24 Using embedded variables Local messages When a display containing a local message display object is open and the message the object is displaying contains an embedded variable the value of the embedded variable is updated whenever a new tag value is read from the data source For time and date embedded variables the time and date are updated as the system time and date change Information messages The value of the embedded variable is read when the information message is first displayed It 1s not updated after that If the message is printed it is printed using the value the variable had when the message was first displayed This value is retained if you shut down and restart the application m Alarm messages The value of the embedded variable is read when the alarm occurs and is displayed in the message associated with the alarm It is not updated after that If the message is printed it is printed using the value the variable had when the alarm first occurred This value is retained if you shut down and restart the application How embedded variables are displayed at run time If there is no valid data available for the embedded variable the variable is rep
224. k them into place For information about aligning objects see page 20 50 For information about locking objects into position see page 20 56 To automatically align objects to the grid as you move them 1 On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 To move objects by dragging with the mouse 1 Select one or more objects 2 Place the pointer on an object not on the edge or on the handles 3 Drag the objects to the desired position E E ooo B E E E E Select the object Drag the object to the desired position If you selected several objects dragging one of the objects moves all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other To move objects in small increments using the keyboard 1 Select one or more objects 2 Place the pointer on the object not on its edge or handle 3 Hold down Shift while you press an arrow key 20 41 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 42 To adjust the amount of the increment first hold down the Shift key and press the or keys on the keyboard s numeric keypad 4 Release the Shift key when the object is in place Copying objects To copy objects you can m drag and drop objects in the same display m drag and drop objects between displays or from a graphic library to a display m copy and paste objects
225. l Save Component name Cancel Untitled 2 If this is the first time you re saving the component type a name in the Component name box and then click OK Closing components To close a component 1 On the File menu click Close or click the Close button on the component s title bar Some components have a Close button that you can click to close the component 18 Working with components Before the component closes you are prompted to save unsaved changes if there are any Adding components into an application You can use the same components in more than one application by adding components into an application For example if you want to use the same graphic display in Application A and Application B create the display in Application A then add the graphic display component from Application A to Application B When you add the component into Application B changes you make to the component in Application B are not reflected in the component in Application A All the language strings associated with the component in Application A are copied into Application B For example if you add an information message file for which three sets of language strings have been defined all three sets of strings are copied into Application B regardless of which languages have been set up for Application B For more information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 To add a component from Application A into Ap
226. l Different sizes of terminals have different function keys 21 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Function key equivalents If your application will run on a personal computer the keyboard contains the function keys F1 to F12 only The remaining function keys are associated with these key combinations For this function key Use this key combination F13 Left Shift F1 F14 Left Shift F2 F15 Left Shift F3 F16 Left Shift F4 F17 Left Shift F5 F18 Left Shift F6 F19 Left Shift F7 F20 Left Shift F8 K1 K12 Right Alt F1 to Right Alt F12 K13 Right Shift F1 K14 Right Shift F2 K15 Right Shift F3 K16 Right Shift F4 K17 Right Shift F5 K18 Right Shift F6 K19 Right Shift F7 K20 Right Shift F8 At run time the operator presses the key combination to activate the object to which the function key is assigned To assign function keys to buttons 1 On the Edit menu click Key Assignments or right click a button and then click Key Assignments 21 6 21 Setting up graphic objects Key Assignment Properties General Select an object Select a key assignment ClozeDigplayButton F4 4 F4 a ClearSlarmnB utton F3 SilencedlanmnsB utton F2 AcknowledgeAlarmB utton F1 Cancel Help For details about using the Key Assignment Properties dialog box to assign function keys and change function key assignments see Help Using the ke
227. l coc CEC M word wrap soe Message file n Cancel Help 21 53 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 54 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the local message display looks like at run time and which local message file to use Inthe Common tab specify the local message display s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression with which the local message display exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up macro buttons Macro buttons run macro files that assign values to tags when the button is pressed For information about creating macros see Chapter 30 To set up a macro button 1 Double click the button Macro Button Properties x General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width 4 M Border uses back color BB Back color Back style Pattern style BB Border color Sold 7 None _ Pattern color Highlight color Shape O T Blink Rectangle Macro Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin 0 0 Other M Audio Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the butt
228. laced with question marks This could occur when a display first opens and the data has not arrived yet or when there is a problem that prevents communication with the data source If a string or numeric embedded variable has been set up but no tag has been assigned the embedded variable is replaced with asterisks Numeric embedded variables The value shown for a numeric embedded variable depends on whether the tag value is a floating point number or an integer Integer values are displayed as is Floating point values are rounded to fit the specified number of digits for the variable For example if the variable is set up to show 6 digits 1234 56 is rounded to 1234 6 1234 44 is rounded to 1234 4 The decimal counts as one of the digits For more information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 If the tag value including the decimal point and minus sign contains more digits than specified for the variable the numeric variable is replaced with asterisks For example if the variable is set up to show 6 digits and the tag value is 123456 the variable will be replaced with asterisks Literal numbers are displayed using the same rules as numeric tag values 24 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 8 Number formats The numeric variable uses the number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol the numeric variabl
229. lation import the translated strings then add the display into the library When you use a library display in your application make sure you add to your application the languages that you plan to use from the library To save a library display with multiple languages 1 Create a graphic display 2 Export the text for your application which will include the text used in the graphic display 3 Translate the text strings into each desired language saving the file with a new name for each language 4 Import the files for all the new languages 5 Add the graphic display to the Libraries folder The library is created with the option Support Multiple Languages selected in the Display Settings dialog box 19 17 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 18 Display Settings General Behavior Display Type a OnTop if Cannot Be Replaced Display Humber Security Code i Title Bar Disable Initial Input Focus Masimum Tag Update Aate 1 seconds Size Use Current Size f Specify Size in Pixels Height ara width 634 Foston P lo ie jo Background Color i Support Multiple Languages Cancel Help For detailed information about importing and exporting to use multiple languages see Chapter 12 To save a library display with more than 40 languages l Create a display in one application with up to 40 languages and add it to the library as des
230. lay You can create your own graphic display for displaying information messages containing an information message display graphic object and the buttons you want to use in the display If you create your own graphic display use an On Top display and select the Cannot Be Replaced option For more information about the information message display graphic object see page 27 7 For information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects see Chapter 19 and Chapter 20 Opening and closing the information message display Opening the display The information message display you specify in the Information Setup editor either the default INFORMATION display or your own display is automatically opened whenever the Value connection s value matches a trigger value You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the information message display For information about setting up a goto display button and specifying the display to open see Help Closing the display The information message display closes when the Value connection s value changes to 0 To automatically close the display when the operator acknowledges a message set up the data source to set the Value connection to 0 when the Ack connection is set to 1 The operator can also close the display by pressing a close display button How the information message display graphic object works At run time when the Value connection at the data sou
231. lay list selector 21 37 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 38 Display List Selector Properties x General States Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Riaisedinset E O Back color BB Border color Pattem style _ Pattern color None _ Selection back color BB Selection fore color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial 0 B zZ uUu Word Bjr C Character Number of states Fa Other M Key navigation MV Wrap around Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top m Inthe States tab specify which graphic display to use for each of the display list selector s states and how each graphic display is named in the list For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Common tab specify the display list selector s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK How to use indicators Indicators display the status of processes or operations by showing different colors captions or images to reflect different states You can create differ
232. lay opens On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option remain open on top of the new Replace display 19 Using graphic displays If the operator attempts to open a Replace display that is already open for example using a goto display button to which the same display is assigned the display does not close and FactoryTalk View sends an error message to FactoryTalk Diagnostics On Top displays Use the On Top option to create pop up displays that open on top of the current Replace display Usually On Top displays are smaller than Replace displays so the operator doesn t lose track of display navigation You can open multiple On Top displays If more than one On Top display is open the display that has focus or had the most recent focus appears on top When an On Top display closes the display that had the most recent focus appears on top Use the Cannot Be Replaced option if you want the On Top display to remain open when a new Replace display is opened On Top displays do not have a Close button in the title bar Be sure to create a close button graphic object in On Top displays so the operator can close them The operator cannot move an On Top display by dragging its title bar The runtime position of the display is fixed according to the position settings defined for the display You can specify unique titles for On Top displays You can use embedded variables in the title and the title text can swit
233. lay settings Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key These settings do not apply when you ramp values For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 Inthe Common tab specify the object s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the numeric input cursor point exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up string displays Use the string display object to show the operator messages from the data source For example you might set up the data source to generate strings that report on the state of a process or operation or that provide instructions about what the operator needs to do next At run time the display shows the operator the string value of the Value connection at the data source How values are displayed m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the string display is blank m FactoryTalk View displays the number of characters bytes specified for the tag assigned to the Value connection To set up a string display 1 Double click the string display 21 33 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 34 String Display Properties x General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedin
234. lbars For details about using the Graphics editor see Help Importing and exporting graphic displays Each graphic display s information is contained in a file called Displayname gfx The Graphics Import Export Wizard in Factory Talk View Studio allows you to export this information to an XML file or to import a graphic display XML file You can export the display information import the graphic display XML file to another FactoryTalk View application and then modify it to suit your requirements Or you can modify the file before importing it You can use the Graphics Import Export Wizard to import graphic display information that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import a FactoryTalk View XML file 19 Using graphic displays For more information about importing and exporting graphic display files see Appendix H Tools and tips for working in the Graphics editor This section describes features of the Graphics editor that help you create your displays It describes how to use context menus and toolbars to perform actions quickly view displays in grayscale to emulate the appearance of a Panel View Plus terminal set up a grid that you can use to position and size objects precisely zoom in when you need to look at details closely correct mistakes test your displays as you work Using context menus No matter where you are in the Graphics editor you can open a menu by cl
235. le tool Undo tool 20 46 4 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape GOL Dragging from a point along the line between corners creates a new angle between the two corners 5 To delete an angle position the pointer at the tip of the angle and then press Delete To reshape arcs and wedges 1 Select the object you want to reshape 2 Click the Arc or Wedge tool or right click the object and then click Edit The cursor changes to the Arc or Wedge tool and handles appear on the object 3 Place the pointer on one of the handles A cross hair appears 4 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape To reshape rounded rectangles 1 Select the rounded rectangle 2 Click the Rounded Rectangle tool or right click the object and then click Edit A handle appears inside the rounded rectangle 3 Click the handle and drag inward to increase roundedness or outward to decrease roundedness Deleting objects If you accidentally delete an object use the Undo tool to restore it To delete objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu click Delete or press Delete on the keyboard To delete all the objects in the display 1 On the Edit menu click Clear All 20 Using graphic objects Working with groups of objects Grouping and ungrouping objects Grouping combines several objects into a single object so you can manipulate them as a single object Grouping is useful for keeping objects
236. lign and size objects When the grid is passive it is visible but does not affect the position of your objects Make the grid passive to position an element between the grid lines Make the grid active and the next object you draw or place is automatically aligned with the grid Making the grid active does not affect the placement of existing objects The grid is visible during application development only It is not visible at run time 19 Using graphic displays To set up the grid 1 On the View menu click Grid Settings or right click an empty area of the display and then click Grid Settings Grid Settings Check this box to make Attributes Spacing the grid visible oy Show Grid Check this box to make gt I Snap To Grid Horizontal x 10 the grid active TEE t EE oO Help Cancel Select a color for the Set the spacing of the grid grid points points in pixels 2 Specify the color and spacing of the grid points 3 To turn on the grid click Show Grid When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can turn the grid on by clicking Show Grid on the View menu 4 To make the grid active click Snap To Grid When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can make the grid active by clicking Snap On on the View menu 5 Click OK To make the grid passive m Inthe Grid Settings dialog box clear the Snap To Grid check box or on the View menu click Snap On to toggle the option off The
237. lines and markers for a trend You can also specify these settings in the Properties tab of the Property Panel To specify this Use this box or column In this tab Chart background color Background color Display Horizontal label color Text color Display Text font style and size Font button Display Pen line pen marker penicon and Color Pens vertical label color Pen line width Width Pens Pen line style Style Pens Pen marker Marker Pens Vertical grid line color Grid color X AXiS Horizontal grid line color Grid color Y AXxis The trend border color The trend border uses the highlight color for the graphic display specified in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box The trend window color By default the trend window uses the background color of the display specified in the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box 28 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To use a different window color 1 Inthe Property Panel select the opaque WindowStyle and then specify the WindowColor property For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 Testing the trend E Test Display tool m Edit Display tool You can quickly test the trend by switching to test mode If communications are active and there is data for the tags the pens plot values in the trend When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes
238. lower_status To display the literal string Oven temperature type this LS 20 Oven temperature To display the literal string 36 5 type this LS 3 36 5 To assign the tag placeholder 1 without a fixed string length type this S 0 1 To display the value of the string tag Conveyor_message with a fixed length of 40 displaying the right most characters with an asterisk to indicate if the message is truncated type this S 40 Conveyor_message SHOWSTAR 24 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 6 Time and date embedded variable syntax Use time and date embedded variables to insert the current time or date into captions title bars and messages Time and date embedded variables use this syntax Time_date_format where Time_date_format uses one of these character sequences These characters Specify this format SD Short date LD Long date SDT Short date and time LDT Long date and time T Time TSD Time and short date TLD Time and long date Example Time and date embedded variable syntax To display the time followed by the short date you would type this TSD A space is placed between the time and date when the embedded variable is displayed at run time How embedded variables are updated at run time At run time this is how embedded variables are displayed and updated m Graphic objects and title bars When a display containing a graphic ob
239. ls To run a different data log model 1 Shut down the application 2 Start FactoryTalk View Studio and open the application 3 In the Startup editor specify the new data log model 4 Create the runtime application See Chapter 14 5 Transfer the runtime application to the runtime platform For information about transferring applications to m apersonal computer see Chapter 15 m aPanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal see Chapter 16 6 Run the new application 26 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 26 6 Displaying data logs using the trend graphic object You can use the trend graphic object to display the data that you ve logged At run time when the operator opens a graphic display containing a trend the trend displays values from the data log file for the data log model that is running The data log model specifies which data to collect in the data log file In addition to displaying historical values from the data log file trends can display current values for the tags in the model Trends can also display current values for tags or expressions that are not in a data log model For more information about trends see Chapter 28 Problems with data logging Problems with data logging occur under these circumstances When your application starts at run time if any of the tags specified in the current data log model do not exist an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If the da
240. ls only the top left image is converted Converting expressions Some PanelBuilder 1400e expression syntax is not supported in FactoryTalk View Expressions are converted without modification and then turned off by placing warning text at the beginning of the first line of the expression In addition exclamation marks 1 are placed at the beginning of each subsequent line of the expression Warming text is also placed in expressions assigned to alarm triggers in the Alarm Setup editor To turn on the expression you must remove the warning text and exclamation marks and revise the syntax if necessary The maximum expression length in FactoryTalk View is 16 000 characters If a PanelBuilder 1400e expression contains more than 16 000 characters the excess characters are not converted FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Browse button Some PanelBuilder 1400e objects support both tags and expressions For these objects if the text assigned to a connection could be valid syntax for both a tag and an expression the connection is treated as an expression and is therefore turned off For example N20 0_String_64 could be the name of a tag or it could be an expression that subtracts O_String_64 from the tag N20 The text would be converted as an expression and turned off To turn on an expression 1 Select the object containing the expression 2 Open the Property Panel and then click the Connecti
241. lso you can click buttons to enter tag names operators Expr Browse button in the Exprn column 23 Using expressions and functions thus avoiding typing mistakes Another advantage of using the Expression editor is that you can check whether the syntax of the expression you ve created is valid To create an expression by typing it directly 1 Type an expression up to 16 000 characters long Expressions that you type directly are not checked for syntax To open the Expression editor do one of the following m Click the Browse button in the Exprn column for a connection that accepts expressions The Browse button is not available for connections to which you can assign only tags m Inthe Animation dialog box click the Expression button 23 3 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE About the Expression editor The Expression editor has these parts Expression box Expression buttons Expression Editor If dla tagBlend sensar_on offt If Logical Arithmetic Bitwi e Functions Tage Check E Syntax f E gt GT Line 1 Column gt GE gt NE OF Cancel Help Cursor position Validation area For details about using the options in the Expression editor see Help Where you can use expressions You can use expressions in these editors m Graphics You can define an expression to control various aspects of a graphic object s appearance For more informatio
242. mation about how to achieve the same result where possible Type of expression component or Equivalent FactoryTalk View syntax operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax if any Exit statement Exit Local variables DIM varname AS varname Integer division x x MOD y y Endif If then endif If then else 0 If then else endif If then else Select case Select Case Use nested if then else Casel1 CaseN CaseElse EndSelect Logical Xor if one or both operands Xor NOT x AND y are Boolean or Single data types OR NOT x OR y FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 16 Order of precedence The order of precedence is slightly different in FactoryTalk View Check your expressions to make sure the result is what you intend PanelBuilder 1400e order of precedence FactoryTalk View order of precedence negation NOT tilde floating point division MOD AND amp amp amp gt gt lt lt integer division OR Il MOD EQ NE lt gt LT lt GI gt LE lt GE gt subtraction lt gt lt gt lt gt Not And Or Xor For more information about order of precedence see page 23 11 _ Appenbrx B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications This appendix describes m terms that are different in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View m steps for converting P
243. me and how to unlatch it m In the States tab specify what the button does when it is latched and unlatched For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up multistate push buttons The multistate push button displays and allows an operator to cycle through multiple options consecutively The multistate push button displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect different states Each time the operator presses the button the tag changes to the value for the next state When the button is in its last state and the operator presses the button the button returns to its first state 21 Setting up graphic objects The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up The error state is also displayed when the display containing the multistate push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a multistate p
244. n about assigning expressions to graphic objects see page 20 38 You can also use expressions to attach animation to graphic objects For more information see Chapter 22 23 4 23 Using expressions Global Connections You can use expressions to remotely control when to open and print displays as well as the date and time to display For more information see Chapter 8 m Alarm Setup When setting up alarms you can use expressions for alarm triggers and with some of the connections that silence and acknowledge alarms For more information see Chapter 9 Information Setup You can use expressions to determine when to display information messages For more information see Chapter 27 m Macros You can use expressions in macros to assign values to tags For more information see page 30 1 Formatting expressions You can format expressions so they are easier to read However do not let tag names function names or function arguments span more than one line When formatting expressions you can use line returns and multiple spaces Enclose strings in quotes The string can contain any character and can include spaces Example Formatting an expression To format this if then else statement you can align the Else with the appropriate If so the logic is easy to understand if tag gt tag2 then 0 else if tag gt tag3 then 2 else 4 Or you can condense it to the following if tag gt tag2 then
245. ncluding domain name if SQL_VARCHAR or 38 there is one that initiated the action that caused the SQL CHAR diagnostics message If the diagnostics message was caused by an HMI server the user column contains System UserFullName The full name of the user that was logged in when SQL VARCHAR or 255 the activity occurred SQL_CHAR Provider The name of the product that generated the message SQL_VARCHAR or 20 SQL_CHAR D 2 _ Appenbrx E Importing and exporting alarm XML files This appendix describes m creating alarm XML files m exporting editing and importing XML files m the alarm XML file structure About XML XML is the Extensible Markup Language used to create documents with structured text information It has a standardized format and structure You can use XML to edit the elements and attributes needed to create an alarm setup file or to modify graphic displays For information about working with graphics XML files see Appendix H Sometimes editing your alarm setup in an XML file is quicker than working in FactoryTalk View For example if you have a list of 100 tags to monitor for alarms with multiple messages for each tag you might prefer to enter all the information in a text editor and then import the alarm setup information into FactoryTalk View Another example of using XML files is to export the alarm setup information you develop in one application import the setup information to another FactoryTalk
246. nction Returns this value CurrentUserHasCode True 1 if any of the specified security codes have been assigned Security Code Letters to the user false 0 if not If checking multiple security codes do not type a space between the security code letters For example CurrentUserHasCode ABP returns the value 1 if the user has been assigned one or more of the specified codes CurrentUserName A string containing the name of the current user This function is case sensitive All RS View 3 20 and earlier user names use uppercase letters For more information about setting up security for your application see Chapter 11 For an example of using the CurrentUserHasCode x function see page 11 11 For examples of using the CurrentUserName function see page 11 24 Language function The language function shows you which language your application is currently using You can display the current language in a string display or use it in expressions to generate language specific messages for your users This function Returns this value CurrentLanguage RFC1766 name of the current runtime language The RFC1766 name is a standard way of representing a language using the format languagecode Country RegionCode where languagecode is a lowercase two letter code and Country RegionCode is an uppercase two letter code For example U S English is en US 23 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 16
247. nd its array size is 8 but its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8 is a block transfer tag with a data type of SINT and its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8 is an I O tag with an address that references an undefined rack is an I O tag with a data type of SINT and its address does not have a bit offset of O or 10 does not have a valid I O address or block transfer address Unsupported graphic object features This section describes features of PanelBuilder graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View The Notes column provides additional information and describes methods for achieving the same result when possible Graphic object Unsupported feature in FactoryTalk View Notes Image text arc ellipse freehand line Blink property polyline rectangle wedge In FactoryTalk View all of the listed objects except images use color animation to blink For details see page 22 9 Color images do not blink Monochrome images use the Blink property to blink Increment Decrement Entry Button Allow Home End Converted to numeric input enable Allow Wrap button Ramping by coarse steps B 10 B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Unsupported feature in FactoryTalk Graphic object View Notes Maintained Push Button Multistate Initial state values If you want to set these objects states on Push Button Standard Control List application startup creat
248. nd tag sets for the same set of ingredients Each pairing of data set with tag set is called a unit Each unit is like a unique recipe At run time the operator can select the unit recipe that applies to the current operation For example a bakery making whole wheat bread could use the same ingredients and tag sets but depending on the type of crust desired could use different data sets to specify different baking temperatures As another example you might want to have multiple production lines baking the same bread In this case the data set for all the production lines would be the same but the tags receiving the recipe information would be different for each production line Units allow you to combine different tag sets and data sets for the same set of ingredients The FactoryTalk View RecipePlus system allows you to create up to 15 000 ingredients 500 data sets 50 tag sets and 2 500 units for each recipe file You can create data sets at 29 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 2 development time edit them at run time and also create new data sets from tag values at run time You can write the data set values to tags or write tag values to data sets The RecipePlus system can be used for manufacturing food and beverages but it can also be used for any application where you want to display edit download or save multiple values at once For example recipes are used in the petrochemical and pharmaceutical
249. nd whether the operand consists of a signed or unsigned data type For signed data types if the left most bit is 0 a 0 is shifted in If the left most bit is 1 a 1 is shifted in In other words the sign of the number is preserved For unsigned data types a 0 is always shifted in Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the left Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand The bit on the left disappears and 0 always shifts in on the right See Using the left shift operator later in this chapter Returns one s complement that is it toggles the bits within an integer or tag Reverses every bit within the number so every bit becomes a 0 and vice versa Using the left shift operator If the left bit is a 1 an overflow occurs and an error message is generated To prevent this use the bitwise AND operator with the left shift operator in an expression For example dev lt lt 1 amp 65535 where dev is a tag whose value is being shifted left and 65535 is 1111 1111 1111 1111 in binary form 23 Using expressions Examples Bitwise operators For these examples tagl 5 binary 0000 0000 0000 0101 and tag2 2 binary 0000 0000 0000 0010 tagl amp tag2 Returns 0 binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 tagl tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tag tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tagl gt gt 1 Returns 2 binary 0000 0000 000
250. nformation about opening the Properties dialog box see page 20 28 With one or more objects selected in the Property Panel click the Image property and then click the Browse button For information about opening the Property Panel see page 20 29 19 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 24 Click an image to select it Image Browser Select image Preview Add p Arrow Lett Arrow Right Arrow Up Delete Backspace End Enter Home Fage Down kd Fage Up Image attributes Type Monochrome Width x Height 22 4 22 Format Bitmap Cancel Help For details about using the Image Browser to import select and delete images see Help You can also remove an image by clicking it in the Images folder and then right clicking Remove or Delete For more information see page 18 4 Tips for using images Using bitmaps versus JPEG images When deciding whether to use a bitmap image or a JPEG image consider these points FactoryTalk View supports 256 color grayscale and 16 million color JPEG images only For all other color types use bitmaps For large color images 16 million color 320 x 240 pixels or larger JPEG images load faster than bitmaps In all other cases bitmaps load faster than JPEGs Color JPEG images have a much smaller file size than the equivalent bitmap image and therefore require less disk space at run time Guidelines for using images Images consume Wind
251. ng groups of objects Edit a group the same way you would edit an individual object You can m use the Property Panel to apply the same properties to all the members of the group at once For example change the line width of all objects in the group to 2 pixels For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 m use the toolbars to apply the same pattern style background style foreground colors and background colors to all the members of the group m for objects with states use the States toolbar to cycle through the states and apply the same properties to the states for each object in the group at once When you select a group containing objects with states only the states that are common to all objects in the group appear in the toolbar For more information about using the States toolbar see page 20 35 Editing objects within a group You can also edit individual objects within the group without breaking the group which is particularly useful when you have animation attached to the group To edit objects within a group 1 Double click the grouped object or right click it and then click Edit A hatched border appears around the group Double click to edit the 4 5 20 Using graphic objects When the hatched border is around the group you are in group edit mode In this mode you can select individual objects in the group and modify them You can also add new objects to the group Cl
252. ng to 4 00 and later applications a 11 5 V Value table 6 2 6 4 7 5 Value trigger type 9 11 Vertical position animation 20 6 22 13 at run time 17 18 Vertical slider animation 20 6 22 14 at run time 17 17 Visibility animation 22 8 using to set up security 11 14 11 24 22 9 W Wallpaper converting graphic objects to 19 14 unlocking 19 14 Wedge graphic object 20 3 20 16 Width animation 20 6 22 13 at run time 17 18 Wildcard characters 7 4 7 7 Window size default graphic displays 4 14 project 4 12 Windows setting up for language switching 12 4 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 editing device shortcuts on 15 6 running applications in 15 1 runtime settings 15 4 Windows languages F 1 Windows metafiles See wmf files Windows network domain logging into 17 1 Index Windows users or groups X a ee Security 11 17 XML using with FactoryTalk View E 1 H 1 adding to RS View 3 20 and earlier applications 11 7 removing from RS View 3 20 and earlier applications 11 8 WINtelligent LOGIC 5 tags importing 7 11 Workbook Mode 2 7 turning on and off 2 7 Workspace 2 5 Write connection 20 31 Write expressions 23 19 XML files alarm structure E 3 creating E 1 H 1 editing E 2 H 2 exporting E 1 H 1 graphics structure H 3 importing E 2 H 3 testing E 2 H 2 XY Plot trend 28 7 l 21
253. nostics clear button Diagnostics list Information Information message acknowledge button display Remove the selected message from all diagnostics lists Acknowledge the current message in the display 20 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE For more information about using the buttons with lists and trends see the topics on these pages For information about See Linking a button to a specific list alarm banner or trend object Page 9 Using buttons with alarm lists alarm banners and alarm status lists Page 35 Using buttons with information message displays Page 6 Using buttons with diagnostics lists Page 12 Using buttons with trends Page 11 Unlike the buttons in the previous table the following buttons do not work with specific graphic objects You can use them to work directly with alarms in the alarm history and with the application s diagnostics messages Use this button Acknowledge all alarms button To do this Acknowledge and silence all currently unacknowledged alarms or the alarms for a specific alarm trigger Clear alarm history button Remove alarms from the alarm log file and all alarm lists You can remove all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger You can also reset the cleared alarms This resets the number of times an alarm has been triggered to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 Reset alarm status button Reset the number of times
254. not use these PanelBuilder features and settings to manage alarms Ack setting for alarm messages in FactoryTalk View all alarms can be acknowledged m bit alarm acknowledgement FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder controls to manage alarms m Remote Ack All Handshake Tag Remote Clear All Alarm Tag m Remote Clear All Alarm Handshake Tag Invalid characters in screen names and tag names Characters in PanelBuilder screen names and tag names that are not supported in FactoryTalk View are replaced with the underscore character Time and date PanelBuilder time and date formats are not converted For details about FactoryTalk View time and date formats see page 21 16 External fonts PanelBuilder external fonts are not converted When you convert your application you can specify the font to use instead For details see Help for the Machine Edition Import Wizard Screen security settings PanelBuilder screen security settings are not converted because FactoryTalk View uses a different method to assign security to graphic displays For information about setting up security in FactoryTalk View see Chapter 11 Power up options These PanelBuilder power up options are not imported into FactoryTalk View m Write Last Terminal State to Controller m Display Last User Screen Use Terminal Presets B 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE B 8 Converting non RIO communications This section describes ho
255. ns 23 14 Memory tags 7 5 using 6 4 Memory usage monitoring at runtime 8 7 Menus in the Graphic Displays editor 19 5 Message severity for diagnostics messages 10 3 Messages displaying 20 10 multiple languages for in RSView ME Station 4 00 23 16 planning 3 5 See also Alarm messages Diagnostics messages Information messages Local messages Microsoft Access logging to 10 7 Microsoft Excel exporting text strings to 12 6 translating text strings in 12 9 Microsoft SQL Server logging to 10 7 Minimum and maximum values for animation 22 6 for HMI tags 6 4 for trends 28 6 Modicon devices 5 1 Momentary push button graphic object 20 4 21 20 atrun time 17 15 Monochrome images 19 21 20 6 Move down button graphic object 20 7 21 16 21 48 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with alarm objects 9 37 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 using with trends 28 11 Move left button graphic object 20 7 21 16 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with trends 28 11 Move right button graphic object 20 7 21 16 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with trends 28 11 Move up button graphic object 20 7 21 16 21 48 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with alarm objects 9 37 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 using with trends 28 11 Index Multistate graphic objects coloring 20 32 setting up 21 2 tes
256. ns tab specify the tag or expression from which the symbol receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up list indicators The list indicator displays a list of states for a process or operation and highlights the current state Each state is represented by a caption in the list This type of indicator is useful if you want operators to view the current state but also see the other possible states For sequential processes the list can inform the operator about what happens next The list indicator has no error state If the value of the Indicator connection does not match any of the available states none of the states is highlighted To set up a list indicator 1 Double click the list indicator List Indicator Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color Raisedinset E O Back color Pattern style BB Border color _ Pattern color None i I Selection fore color _ Selection back color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial 0 B z u Word Character State settings Number of states Trigger type 5 Value OK Cancel Help ok 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the ind
257. ns upright To rotate a drawing object 1 On the Objects menu click Rotate or on the Objects toolbar click the Rotate tool 2 Click the object you want to rotate A small crosshair circle appears in the middle of the object This is the anchor point that is used as the center of rotation 20 55 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 56 You can place the crosshair inside an object ney You can place the crosshair outside an object 4 3 To move the center of rotation click the cross hair and drag it to a new anchor position The anchor can be inside or outside the object 4 Click an edge of the object and drag in the direction you want to rotate it To rotate the object in five degree increments press Ctrl while you drag 5 When the object is in the desired position release the mouse button Locking objects into position You can lock graphic objects or groups of objects into position by converting them to wallpaper Once you convert objects to wallpaper you cannot select or edit them unless you unlock the wallpaper Wallpaper objects cannot be animated at run time If the grid is on wallpaper objects are positioned behind the grid If you just want to lock the objects into place while you re working in the display unlock the wallpaper when you re finished If you want to use the wallpaper objects as a background for your display leave the wallpaper locked For more information about creating
258. nts in a 20 25 Object Smart Path 22 4 22 7 ODBC storage format for diagnostics messages D 1 Off line tags browsing for 6 7 On Top displays 19 13 sizing 4 13 using for alarms 9 30 using for diagnostics messages 10 11 using for information messages 27 7 OPC communications and RSLinx Classic 5 1 setting up 5 1 using to connect to Logix5000 processors 7 6 OPC servers items in 7 6 OPC tags addressing syntax for 7 5 Operators in expressions 23 7 Oracle logging to 10 7 P Page down button graphic object 20 7 21 17 21 48 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with alarm objects 9 37 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 Page up button graphic object 20 7 21 17 21 48 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 using with alarm objects 9 37 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 Panel graphic object 20 2 20 16 PanelBuilder 1400e applications converting A 1 PanelBuilder 32 applications converting B 1 PanelBuilder applications converting B 1 PanelView Plus CE terminals logging diagnostics messages from 10 6 10 8 transferring applications to 16 1 PanelView Plus terminals logging diagnostics messages from 10 6 10 8 running applications on 16 1 transferring applications to 16 1 Parameter files 20 40 25 1 assigning to graphic displays 25 2 using display list selectors 25 2 using goto display buttons 25 2 crea
259. o create an embedded variable in an On Top display s title bar l 2 3 Open the Display Settings dialog box Select the Title Bar check box 1f it is not already selected Click Insert Variable Click the type of variable to insert 24 Using embedded variables 5 Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help To create an embedded variable in a message 1 Inthe Message column of the Local Messages Information Messages or Alarm Setup editor right click and then click Edit String Oven temperature A 3 Overn_temp NOFILL OP 0 Insert Warable Cancel Help 2 Click Insert Variable 3 Click the type of variable to insert 4 Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help Embedded variable syntax Embedded variables are case sensitive and must use specific syntax to work Otherwise the embedded variable is treated as a piece of text Therefore we do not recommend creating and editing embedded variables manually Instead use the Insert Variable and Edit Variable dialog boxes Numeric embedded variable syntax Use numeric embedded variables to insert analog or digital tag values into captions title bars and messages You can use both HMI and data server tags You can also insert literal numbers to display a constant or to specify a tag placeholder in the caption or message Numeric embedded variables
260. o the objects The Property Panel is especially useful for making changes to the properties of multiple objects at the same time 20 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To open the Property Panel use one of these methods g Show Hide Property Panel tool E On the Graphics toolbar click the Property Panel tool On the View menu click Property Panel Right click an object and then click Property Panel Right click an empty area of the display and then click Property Panel You can keep the Property Panel open as you work in the Graphics editor You can drag the panel s borders to make the Property Panel larger or smaller Setting up properties Use the Property Panel s Properties tab to set up the properties of the selected object or objects If only one object is Property Panel Click to close selected this box shows p Multiple Selection 9 Click for help on the the object s name and type Ifa group objectis selected click this button to edit the selected property Properties Connections All Properties C Shared Properties GroupH eight properties of the objects oot Scroll to see more within the group properties GroupT op Groupy isible Group fidth Alignment Middle Center Audio True AutoRepeatD elay 400 msec AutoRepeath ate 0 BackColor E oona BackS tile Solid Blink False BorderColor mmm 00800000 Or drag the splitter bar to Sb see more properties
261. ocess prompts or instructions and information about current states Information messages versus local messages Use information messages to give the operator information no matter which display is open To give the operator information in a specific graphic display while the display is open use local messages For details about local messages see page 19 25 Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up information messages 1 In the Information Messages editor set up the messages and their trigger values 2 Inthe Information Setup editor specify the graphic display to open when information messages occur and the file of messages to display Also use this editor to assign a tag or expression to the Value connection If you want the operator to acknowledge messages assign the Ack connection and specify the acknowledge hold time 2 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 In the Startup editor ensure that the Information messages box is checked it is checked by default See Chapter 14 4 If desired in the Graphics editor modify the default INFORMATION display or create your own graphic display to use for information messages For example if you don t want the operator to acknowledge messages edit the default display to remove the information acknowledge button For information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 Using the Information Messages editor Use the Information Messages editor to
262. ociated with each language You can use the codes to name the translated application files before importing them The codes are also used with the CurrentLanguage function RFC1766 Language Country Region Name af ZA Afrikaans South Africa sq AL Albanian Albania ar DZ Arabic Algeria ar BH Arabic Bahrain ar EG Arabic Egypt ar IQ Arabic Iraq ar JO Arabic Jordan ar K W Arabic Kuwait ar LB Arabic Lebanon ar LY Arabic Lybia ar MA Arabic Morocco ar OM Arabic Oman ar QA Arabic Qatar ar SA Arabic Saudi Arabia ar S Y Arabic Syria ar TN Arabic Tunisia ar AE Arabic United Arab Emirates ar YE Arabic Yemen hy AM Armenian Armenia az AZ Cyrl Azeri Cyrillic Azerbaijan az AZ Latn Azeri Latin Azerbaijan F 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE F 2 RFC1766 Language Country Region Name eu ES Basque Basque be BY Belarusian Belarus bg BG Bulgarian Bulgaria ca ES Catalan Catalan Zh HK Chinese Hong Kong SAR Default Sort Order Stroke Count zb HK Chinese Hong Kong SAR Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh MO Chinese Macau SAR Default Sort Order Pronunciation zh MO Chinese Macau SAR Alternate Sort Order Str
263. of the listed objects except images and panels use color animation to blink For details see page 22 9 Panels use the Blink property to blink Color images do not blink Monochrome images use the Blink property to blink Numeric Display Polarity If a PanelBuilder 1400e application was set up with the Polarity control requiring a negative number to display the minus sign the numeric display will not work properly after the application is converted to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Numeric Input Cursor Point Fixed Position and PLC Use an expression to achieve the same result Assign the Numeric Data Display Controlled decimal display expression to the object s Value connection For options information about expressions see Chapter 23 Numeric Input Cursor Point PLC Controlled and Decimal Objects are converted with the Decimal Point property Numeric Keypad Enable Button Key Controlled input options Numeric Keypad set to Implicit Numeric Input Cursor Point Retain Cursor on Cancel The numeric input cursor point retains focus when the operator cancels entering a numeric value Maintained Push Button Initial state values If you want to set these objects states on application Multistate Push Button Control List Selector startup create a macro to set the appropriate tag values for the objects connections For information about macros see Chapter 30 Assign the macro in the Startup editor For details
264. og box 4 In the dialog box specify how the object looks its behavior and connections For more information about the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 Creating drawing objects The following instructions for creating drawing objects describe how to create the objects and then open the objects Properties dialog boxes to set up how the objects look For information about using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 A Text tool 20 Using graphic objects Creating text Choosing fonts You can select any font you have installed but TrueType and OpenType fonts are recommended These fonts can be resized easily without losing text quality For PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals you must use TrueType fonts If you run an application on a computer that does not have the fonts you used when setting up the application Windows substitutes with the fonts that most closely match the fonts you specified Choosing fonts for language switching If you are going to use the application with multiple languages we recommend using Microsoft Sans Serif or Tahoma These fonts allow for font linking to support the character sets of other languages PanelView Plus and Pan
265. oke Count zh CN Chinese China Default Sort Order Pronunciation zh CN Chinese China Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count Zh SG Chinese Singapore Default Sort Order Pronunciation Zh SG Chinese Singapore Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh TW Chinese Taiwan Default Sort Order Stroke Count zh TW Chinese Taiwan Alternate Sort Order Bopomofo hr HR Croatian Croatia cs CZ Czech Czech Republic da DK Danish Denmark div MV Dhivehi Maldives nl BE Dutch Belgium nl NL Dutch The Netherlands en AU English Australia en BZ English Belize en CA English Canada en CB English Caribbean en IE English Ireland en JM English Jamaica en NZ English New Zealand en PH English Philippines en ZA English South Africa en TT English Trinidad and Tobago en GB English United Kingdom F e RFC1766 names RFC1766 Language Country Region Name en US English United States en ZW English Zimbabwe et EE Estonian Estonia fo FO Faroese Faroe Islands fa IR Farsi Iran fi FI Finnish Finland fr BE French Belgium fr CA French Canada fr FR French France fr LU French Luxembourg fr MC French Monaco fr CH French Switzerland mk MK FYRO Macedonian gl ES Galician Galician ka
266. olor Yes No Caption back color No Yes Fore color Yes No Foreground color Yes No Image color Yes No Image back color No Yes Legend color Yes No Needle color Yes No Pattern color Yes No For objects with states the selected color is applied to the current state s color properties only In the Property Panel properties that apply to states have St_ at the beginning of the property name When to select colors using the toolbars For all the drawing objects except image and panel you can select colors from the color toolbars before you draw an object either before or after you click the object s tool 20 33 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 34 The other objects are always drawn using their default colors but you can select the objects and then click the toolbars to change their colors The toolbars are especially useful for quickly assigning the same colors to multiple objects To display a color toolbar 1 Onthe View menu select Toolbars and then click Foreground Colors or Background Colors To close a color toolbar 1 On the View menu select Toolbars and then click Foreground Colors or Background Colors or click the toolbar s Close button Other methods for assigning colors You can also assign colors using an object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel Use one of these methods if you want to assign separate colors to different foreground or background color properties or to
267. on looks like at run time and the macro to run when the button is pressed m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up time and date displays A time and date display shows the current time and date in a graphic display To set up a time and date display 1 Double click the time and date display Time Date Display Properties x General Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color fe BB Back color Back style Pattern style o Border color Solid None _ Pattern color _ Fore color F Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial gt fio B z u eee Cel lV Word wrap eee Time and date format 9 3 2002 8 38 50 4M OK Cancel Help O 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the time and date display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the time and date display s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 21 55 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up print alarm history buttons The operator can press the print alarm history button to print a report of all the ala
268. onnection is set to 1 If you don t use the delay the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 the operator cannot send new values to the data source If the Handshake reset type is Non zero Value the Enter handshake connection must be 0 when the delay expires in order to set the Enter connection to 1 3 When the Enter connection is set to 1 the Enter key handshake time timer begins timing 4 The Enter connection remains set until the Enter key handshake time expires or until reset by the Enter handshake connection whichever happens first 21 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 16 5 The Enter connection is reset to 0 and the operator can send a new value to the Value connection To set up Enter key handshaking to hold the value until the data source has read it 1 In the Timing tab of the object s Properties dialog box specify these properties Enter key control delay optional m Enter key handshake time m Handshake reset type 2 Inthe Connections tab assign these connections m Enter assign a tag A digital tag is recommended either an HMI tag or a data server tag m Enter handshake assign a tag or expression 3 Set up the data source to send a non zero value to the Enter handshake connection when it has read the new value at the Value connection and then to reset the Enter handshake connection to 0
269. ons tab 3 In the Exprn column click the Browse button beside the expression to turn on 4 Inthe Expression editor delete the warning text and exclamation marks 5 Revise the expression if necessary using the tables in the following three sections as guides 6 Click Check Syntax For more information about using the Expression editor see Chapter 23 or Help Equivalent expression syntax This table describes FactoryTalk View expression syntax that is equivalent to PanelBuilder 1400e syntax When you edit the converted expressions replace the PanelBuilder 1400e syntax with the FactoryTalk View equivalent Syntax that is not listed in this table or in the next section is okay the way it is Type of expression component or operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax FactoryTalk View syntax Comment REM or lt Line continuation _ underscore Not needed Equality EQ or A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Type of expression component or operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax FactoryTalk View syntax Bitwise Not Not tilde Bitwise And And amp Bitwise Or Or pipe Bitwise XOr XOr If both operands are Byte Integer Long Variant or any combination of these data types use the FactoryTalk View syntax For other data types no change is needed Unsupported expression syntax This table describes the PanelBuilder 1400e expression syntax that is not supported in FactoryTalk View with infor
270. ons to objects see page 21 9 Use these buttons with trends This button Does this Pause Toggles between pausing and automatic scrolling When the trend is paused the pen icons continue to move vertically to indicate the pens current values When the trend resumes scrolling values that occurred while the trend was paused are filled in bringing the trend up to the current time unless you are scrolling historical data Next pen Changes the vertical axis labels to the scale for the next pen The color of the labels matches the color of the selected pen Move up Scrolls up to display higher values on the vertical scale For example if the visible scale range is 0 to 100 pressing move up could change the visible range to 10 to 110 The incremental amount the axis scrolls depends on the pen s range and the number of horizontal grid lines This button does not work if the Minimum maximum value option in the Y Axis tab is set to Automatic Move down Scrolls down to display lower values on the vertical scale This button does not work if the Minimum maximum value option in the Y Axis tab is set to Automatic Move left Pauses the trend and scrolls to the left Move right Pauses the trend and scrolls to the right Home Pauses the trend and moves to the earliest data in the trend 28 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This button Does this End Resumes trend scrolling and
271. onstant Min 20 Mar 240 se eae ooo o o Cec con c Read from l see bags l App Delete Close Help Expression range Animation result For details about the parts of the Animation dialog box see Help Using Object Smart Path to visually set animation Because the Animation dialog box stays open you can go back and forth between the dialog box and the graphic display This makes it easy to set the range of motion for an object because you do not have to know how many pixels you want an object to move Instead you can set the range of motion visually using the Object Smart Path feature For details see page 22 7 22 Animating graphic objects Testing animation Test Display tool E Edit Display tool To test the animation you have set up in a graphic display use the Test Display tool to switch to test mode When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes 1 On the View menu click Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Using tag names and tag placeholders When setting up animation for objects you are linking objects to tags You can specify a tag name or use tag placeholder You can use HMI tags or data server tags that already exist
272. or connection Indicates the end of the connections element Indicates the end of the object2 element Indicates the end of the gfx element You can specify multiple attributes for an element For example the caption element contains 13 possible attributes Elements for group objects begin with lt group gt and end with lt group gt The lt group gt element contains all the elements for each object in the group For more information about graphic object elements and their attributes see Help for the Graphics Import Export Wizard H 5 Index Symbols bmp files 19 20 importing 19 21 location of 19 21 placing in graphic displays 20 14 tips for using 19 24 viewing 19 22 dxf files 19 20 placing in graphic displays 20 20 jpg files 19 20 importing 19 21 placing in graphic displays 20 14 tips for using 19 24 viewing 19 22 mea files 4 11 med files 4 2 mer files 4 2 comparing 16 7 converting to med 14 3 14 6 creating 14 2 transferring from Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE 16 6 to PanelView 16 1 16 5 to Panel View Plus CE 16 1 16 5 to personal computers 15 1 15 3 wmf files 19 20 placing in graphic displays 20 20 xml files 9 4 19 4 E 1 H 1 Numerics 21 CFR Part 11 compliance 10 4 A A I 5 tags importing 7 11 AB_DF1 1 using to transfer applications 16 5 AB_ETH 1 using to transfer applications 16 5 Acknowledge alarm button gr
273. or more information see page 23 11 Bitwise operators Bitwise operators examine and manipulate individual bits within a value These operators are for integers only not floating point numbers Do not use them with tags or expressions that return floating point values Symbol Operator amp And inclusive OR Action for examples see page 23 11 Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if both the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 Otherwise the resulting bit is 0 Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if either or both of the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 If both bits are 0 the resulting bit is Q 23 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 10 Symbol Operator Action for examples see page 23 11 a exclusive OR XOR Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis gt gt right shift lt lt left shift complement Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if the corresponding bits in the original numbers differ If both bits are 1 or both are 0 the resulting bit is 0 Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the right Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand The bit on the right disappears Either a O or a 1 is shifted in on the left depending on whether the left most bit is a O or a 1 a
274. or more objects 4 Click the selected object and drag it to the new display If you selected several objects dragging one of the objects copies all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other Copying and pasting objects You can cut copy or paste objects using the menu items on the Edit menu or the buttons on the toolbar Once you cut or copy an object you can paste it anywhere in the drawing area of m the same graphic display m a graphic display in the same or a different application m agraphic library in the same or a different application To cut or copy objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu click Cut or Copy or click the Cut or Copy tool on the Graphics toolbar m To remove the original object click Cut m To retain the original object click Copy To paste objects 1 Click in the display or library to paste to 2 On the Edit menu click Paste or click the Paste tool on the Graphics toolbar Duplicating objects When an object is duplicated any animation attached to the object is also duplicated If a group is duplicated the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects To duplicate objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu click Duplicate or click the Duplicate tool on the Graphics toolbar The duplicated object is placed slightly offset from the original 20 43 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE
275. ormation about handling multiple applications with different RIO settings see the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase For information about using the Application Manager see page 4 10 Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags A PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tag will be converted to an HMI memory tag and an error will be logged to the conversion log file if the RIO tag m has a blank address m has a data type of 1 BCD 2 BCD 3 BCD 5 BCD 6 BCD or 7 BCD m has a data type of Bit Position and its address does not reference a single bit m float has a data type of Float and its address has a bit offset assigned that is not Q m has a data type of Long Integer or 8 Digit BCD its address has a bit offset assigned that is not 0 and its length or range is greater than 32 Start Bit m has a tag type of Block m has an invalid PanelBuilder 1400e address or references an undefined rack FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Unsupported graphic object features This section describes features of PanelBuilder 1400e graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View The Notes column provides additional information and describes methods for achieving the same result when possible Unsupported feature in Graphic object FactoryTalk View Notes Image text arc ellipse line Blinking wallpaper objects panel rectangle wedge If you want an object to blink at run time unlock the wallpaper In FactoryTalk View all
276. oryTalk View are replaced with the underscore character Screen security settings PanelBuilder 1400e screen security settings are not converted because FactoryTalk View uses a different method to assign security to graphic displays For information about setting up security in FactoryTalk View see Chapter 11 Block tags Block tags are not supported in FactoryTalk View Block tags that are monitored for alarms in your PanelBuilder 1400e application are converted to bit arrays For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm conditions see Chapter 9 Converting non RIO communications This section describes how communications that do not use Remote I O RIO are converted For information about converting RIO communications see page A 10 FactoryTalk View does not use nodes for communications Nodes are converted to RSLinx topics Topics are then converted into device shortcuts to run with RSLinx Enterprise You must have both RSLinx Classic and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two step conversion Tags are converted to HMI device tags and RSLinx aliases The Unsolicited_Msgs node is not converted If you import an application multiple times delete the device shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise before re importing Otherwise multiple unused device shortcuts will be created in RSLinx Enterprise For more information about setting up communications see Chapter 5 Unsupported tag data types These tag data typ
277. ose to the specified object making it easier for the operator to understand which buttons work with which objects 21 Setting up graphic objects FS Tank output Display Tank Ouput Control System Activity Pionek Seevherrbeer C2 20 10 00000060 7 E E DDOIOO 7 pihe tag Tank _ utpur has no 2 Dolice OU tag Tanki output has no ed a ia he item Tank output does ee ka he item Tank output does 6 0000008 7 BThe tag Tanke output has no 1 0 0000 Oe F B10 Poll 17 04 PA Details Tan Tankd Dock Railyvarc Each object has its own set of buttons To link a button to a specific object using the button s Properties dialog box 1 Double click the button to open its Properties dialog box 2 In the General tab in the Send press to box select Linked Object 3 To select from a list of all the objects in the display that you can link the button to click the Browse button next to the Linked object box 4 Click the name of the object to link the button to and then click OK 5 Click OK to close the button s Properties dialog box To link a button to a specific object using the Property Panel l In the Properties tab specify the SendPressTo and LinkedObject properties Once you have linked buttons to an object you might want to turn off the object s key navigation since this option is no longer needed For details see page 21 9 21 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE E
278. ou can assign tag placeholders to the connections for base objects and to connections for reference objects with the LinkConnections property set to False For more information about global objects see page 25 6 You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run Specify the graphic display to open and the parameter file to use with it in the Startup editor m graphic displays that are opened using goto display buttons Specify the graphic display to open and the parameter file to use with it when you set up the button m graphic displays that are opened using display list selectors Specify the graphic displays to open and the parameter files to use with them when you set up the display list selector Summary of steps Follow these steps to use tag placeholders and parameter files 1 In the Graphics editor create graphic objects and assign tag placeholders to the objects 2 Inthe Parameters editor create parameter files for each set of tags that the display will use In the parameter files specify which tags to substitute for which placeholders 3 Inthe Graphics editor create goto display buttons or display list selectors for opening the display containing tag placeholders Specify the appropriate parameter files in the Goto Display Button Properties dialog box or Display List Selector Properties dialog box For information about setting up goto display buttons see page 2
279. ou can use an Enter key control delay if desired 21 Setting up graphic objects How the Handshake reset type works How the Enter handshake connection resets the Enter connection depends on which Handshake reset type you select With this handshake reset type The Enter connection is set to 0 when Non zero Value The Enter handshake connection has a non zero value If the Enter handshake connection already has a non zero value when the value is sent to the Value connection or when the Enter key control delay has expired if the delay is used then the Enter connection is not set to 1 and Enter key handshaking does not take place Zero to Non zero transition The Enter handshake connection changes from 0 to a non zero value Set up the data source to send a non zero value to the Enter handshake connection when it has read the new value at the Value connection and then to reset the Enter handshake connection to Q If the Enter key handshake time expires before the Enter handshake connection resets the Enter connection an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics How handshaking works If you use the Enter handshake connection handshaking works like this 1 When the operator presses the Enter button the value is sent to the Value connection and the Enter key control delay timer begins timing The use of a delay is optional 2 If you specify an Enter key control delay when the time is up the Enter c
280. ouble click the text The Text Properties dialog box opens 2 Inthe Text box click where you want to make the change To delete text characters use the Backspace and Delete keys Creating images Use the image graphic object to place bitmap and JPEG images in your graphic displays Images support visibility animation only at Image tool 20 Using graphic objects Using bitmaps and JPEG images Before you can place a bitmap or JPEG image in a display you must import the image into your application For more information see page 19 21 To place a bitmap or JPEG image in a display 1 Select the Image tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the image and then drag to draw a rectangle The Image Browser opens Image Browser Select image Preview Image attributes Type Monochrome Add Delete Width x Height 22 22 Format Bitmap oK Cancel Help 3 In the Select image list click the image to place and then click OK For more information about using the Image Browser see page 19 23 The image is placed where you drew the rectangle but the actual size of the image is used rather than the size of the rectangle you drew 4 To change the image s attributes double click the image to open the Image Properties dialog box 5 Select image options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 6 Click OK to close the dialog box 20 15 FACTORYTALK
281. ouch margins for buttons that are positioned close together to ensure that the adjacent button is not pressed by mistake Using touch margins Touch margins are touch insensitive borders inside the button s margin If the operator presses on the touch margin the button press is not registered Touch margins are useful when buttons are positioned close to each other and you want to make sure the operator doesn t press the wrong button by mistake You can create touch margins at the top and bottom of the button at the sides or on all four sides In the illustration below the button s border and touch margins are the same size 12 pixels A button press would be registered only when the darker square in the middle of the button is pressed E E E l The margins atthe top and ___ The margins atthe left and bottom edges are called ight edges are called vertical touch margins E m horizontal touch margins E E E 21 Setting up graphic objects The bounding box If the object s shape is a circle or ellipse the touch margin applies to the object s bounding box not the object s border The bounding box is an invisible square or rectangle that surrounds the object When you select the object the selection handles show the location of the bounding box E E The invisible bounding box is just E inside the selection handles To create touch margins use one of these methods m Inthe General tab of the but
282. our displays as needed This method is useful for images that you use to illustrate your displays For information about placing images in your display once you ve imported them see page 20 15 m use the Image Browser to import images as needed while setting up your graphic objects This method is useful for images that you use as labels on your graphic objects For information about using the Image Browser see page 19 23 m copy and paste images from the graphic libraries For information about copying and pasting objects see page 20 42 m copy and paste images from one application to another 19 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 22 For information about opening two applications at once see page 4 9 If you will be using images that have more than 256 colors before importing the images set up your video adapter to display more than 256 colors This will ensure that the colors of imported images appear the same as in the original For more tips about using images see page 19 24 To import bitmap and JPEG images 1 In the Graphics folder right click Images and then click Add Component Into Application To view the images click this button and then click Thumbnails Add Component Into Project Look in Sy Dini im Ee EF Din00 bmp YF Dind08 bmp P Din S bmp YF Din 24 br WY Din002 bmp m Din0S bmp a DinO16 bmp
283. ows resources so when using graphic images use the lowest color depth possible 19 Using graphic displays The more colors you use the more memory is consumed and the longer the image takes to load and display This bitmap type Consumes this many bits per pixel Monochrome l 16 color 4 256 color 8 1 byte 64 K color 16 2 bytes 16 million color 24 3 bytes For example a 24 bit bitmap image that measures 800x600 pixels consumes 1440 KB of memory If the bitmap color depth is decreased to 256 colors the image might have minor color loss but the new image uses only 480 KB of memory Use images with a similar pixel size to the size of the Factory Talk View object on which the image will be placed FactoryTalk View resizes the image to fit the object but if you use an image that is much larger than the object the display will be slow to open at run time due to the time required to resize the image Using local messages Use local messages to give the operator ongoing information about the status of devices and processes For example you might use local messages to describe the status of a device whose condition cannot be shown graphically with complete accuracy The messages you create in the Local Messages editor are displayed in local message display objects in graphic displays You can use multiple local message display objects in your application and link each object to a different file of messages Or yo
284. ox Select arc or wedge options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK You can also use the Arc and Wedge tools to reshape arcs and wedges For more information see page 20 45 Creating ellipses and circles Use the Ellipse tool to draw an ellipse or circle To create an ellipse or circle l 2 5 Select the Ellipse tool Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw an ellipse or circle of the desired size To draw a circle hold down Ctrl while you drag To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box Select circle or ellipse options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK Creating freehand shapes Using the Freehand tool is similar to drawing with a pen on paper To create a freehand shape l Select the Freehand tool 20 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Click and drag to create the shape you want 3 To change how the object looks double click it to open the Freehand Properties dialog Freehand tool box 4 Select freehand options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 5 To close the dialog box click OK Creating lines To create a line N 1 Select the Line tool Line tool 2 Click where you want the line to start and then drag from the beginn
285. perator presses the buttons to scroll up or down the list or to make selections from the list The buttons can be set up to work with the piloted control list selector that has focus or with a specific piloted control list selector You can use the buttons listed in the table on page 21 48 Selecting items in the list Each state can be selected directly by an operator or remotely by a device such as a programmable controller The operator or the controller scrolls through the list to select a different state or a different group of visible states When an operator or remote device selects a state the value assigned to the selected state is written to the piloted control list selector s Value connection If the state is turned off the state s value is not written to the Value connection If the operator attempts to select a state that is remote controlled the state s value is not written to the Value connection Scrolling through the list If the piloted control list selector contains more states than can be displayed in the list simultaneously the value of the Top Position connection if assigned changes whenever the item at the top of the list changes If the Visible States connection is assigned the values assigned to all visible states are written to the Visible States connection whenever the list scrolls To use this feature the assigned tag must support arrays and the array must be the same length as the number of 21 51
286. phic objects Place the pointer on one of the handles A double arrow appears Drag the handle until the object is the desired size or shape Drag a side handle to change width or height or a corner handle to change both m 8 E E E E E z z E 2 i a E no TL E E g For perfect circles and squares press Ctrl and hold the key down while you drag a corner handle To maintain the object s original proportions width to height press Shift and hold the key down while you drag a corner handle To resize an object in small increments using the keyboard l 2 Select the object Place the pointer on one of the handles A double arrow appears Hold down Shift and press an arrow key until the object is the desired size To adjust the amount of the increment first hold down the Shift key and press the or keys on the keyboard s numeric keypad Reshaping drawing objects You can reshape arcs lines polygons polylines rectangles rounded rectangles and wedges To reshape lines rectangles polylines and polygons 1 2 Select the object you want to reshape Click the Polygon tool or right click the object and then click Edit The cursor changes to the Polygon tool and handles appear on the object Move the cursor over any line or corner of the object A handle with a cross hair appears 20 45 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE a Arc tool a Wedge tool E Rounded rectang
287. plication B 1 In Application B right click the type of editor that was used to create the desired component For example to add a graphic display component right click the Displays icon in the Graphics folder 2 Click Add Component Into Application Add Component Into Project E Look in ack af 3 hi ACTIVITY gfx m Germ Dampers gfs a Kilnmachine gt a ALAR MM gh ea GermD esc gtx a Kulp achineControl c a COMMS TATUS gfx a Genk achine gtx a EilnStepControl gfs a INFORMATION oh GermmM achineContral gts ea Overview gis a Comms tatus gf a GerrmnStepControl gfs a processdesc gfs a FanFioom gf a Kiln Status of a PumpRioom gfx la FanRoomDesc gf El Kinl esc gfs la FumphoomD esc gfs gt l Files of type Graphics fs Cancel amp 3 In the dialog box navigate to the component to add in Application A s folder and then click the component s file name 18 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 18 4 Click and Shift click to select a group of components or Ctrl click to select multiple individual components For information about application folders and files see Chapter 4 lt italics gt Working with applications 4 Click Open The components are listed under the editor in the Explorer window in Application B If you later modify the component in Application
288. pression For more information about expressions see Chapter 23 Replacing tags using tag substitution You can replace tags assigned to the graphic objects in your display by using tag substitution You can also replace the tags used in expressions assigned to graphic objects For example if you assign a tag called HoistHeight to multiple objects in the display and then decide to use the tag Hoist_height instead you can use tag substitution to quickly replace the old tag with the new tag You can replace m atag name with or without folder names m a folder name m the text in an expression m tags contained in embedded variables 20 Using graphic objects To replace tags 1 Select one or more objects To select all the objects in the display on the Edit menu click Select All 2 On the Edit menu click Tag Substitution To replace the tags for a single object you can right click it and then click Tag Substitution Tag Substitution Search for tank_flows x hank_input_conmectart flank_output_ connector Replace with tank 1_flow aa ftank_flows lank_input_ connector tank_output_ connector W Confirm replacements Close Help For details about the options in the Tag Substitution dialog box see Help Using tag placeholders Tag placeholders provide a way to use one graphic display to represent a number of similar operations For example suppose you are creating displays for
289. print button Print the current display For details see page 19 30 Language switch button Switch the application language For details see page 21 16 Login button Open the Login dialog box and then log in For details see page 11 12 Logout button Log out of the application For details see page 11 13 Password button Change the current user s password For details see page 17 4 Shutdown button Stop the application and shut down FactoryTalk View ME Station For details see page 13 7 Goto configure mode button Stop the application and open the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box For details see page 13 4 Print alarm history button Print a report of alarm messages in the alarm log file You can print a report for all alarms or for a specified alarm trigger For details see page 21 56 Print alarm status button Print a report of the status of alarms including how many times each alarm was triggered and the time in alarm You can print a report for all alarms or for a specified alarm trigger For details see page 21 57 Starting and controlling processes Use this graphic object To do this Momentary push button Start a process or action by sending one value to the tag when pressed and another value when released For details see page 21 20 Maintained push button Toggle between two values by sending one value to the tag when pressed and a second v
290. raphic object a 20 8 21 17 using to reset alarms 9 9 using with alarm status lists 9 37 Return to display button graphic object 20 4 21 17 using to navigate 13 3 13 5 RFC1766 names F 1 Right click menus 19 5 Rotation animation 20 6 20 55 22 13 at run time 17 18 Rounded rectangle graphic object 20 3 20 20 RSLinx Classic 1 1 and OPC 5 1 RSLinx Enterprise 1 1 array tag syntax 9 16 device shortcuts created at runtime 14 3 14 6 setting up drivers in atrun time 15 9 for transfer to PanelView Plus 16 5 for transfer to Panel View Plus CE 16 5 RSLogix 5 tags importing 7 11 RSLogix 500 tags importing 7 11 RSLogix 5000 6 2 Runtime changing tag values 17 15 deleting log files 15 15 displaying tag values 17 17 entering numeric values 17 6 entering string values 17 10 font substitution 20 13 logging in and out 17 2 17 6 automatic logout 11 13 problems with logging in 17 4 printing 2 15 graphic displays 19 30 printing graphic displays 19 30 setting up communication drivers on personal computers 15 9 setting up printers on personal computers a 15 10 switching language at 13 3 time date and number formats 15 16 using graphic objects 21 3 viewing alarms and messages 17 19 viewing communication errors 17 20 Runtime application mer files 16 1 converting to development application a 14 3 14 6 opening 15 4 on personal computers 15 4 15 11 running
291. rce changes from 0 to a non zero value the assigned information message display opens If the value matches a message s trigger value the associated information message appears in the information message display graphic object The object can be in the default INFORMATION display in an 21 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 8 information message display you have created or can be placed in any display in your application For information about setting up the information message display graphic object see page 21 63 What is displayed If the Value connection is unassigned the information message graphic display never opens automatically If the operator opens a graphic display containing an information message display object the object is blank The Value connection is rounded up to the nearest integer If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file the display is filled with question marks 7 For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 If the message is too long to fit in the information message display object the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk When the Value connection s value is 0 the information message graphic display is closed If you set up information messages in multiple languages messages are displayed in the current application language When a language switch occurs a message that was already in the
292. re is no check mark beside the menu item when it is turned off To turn off the grid m Inthe Grid Setting dialog box clear the Show Grid check box or on the View menu click Show Grid to toggle the option off Zooming in and out To magnify or reduce your view of a graphic display use Zoom In and Zoom Out Zoom In magnifies objects Zoom Out reduces magnification 19 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE E Zoom In tool D Zoom Out tool l Undo tool A Redo tool 19 10 To zoom in on objects 1 Select the objects you want to zoom in on 2 Onthe View menu click Zoom In or click the Zoom In tool To zoom out m On the View menu click Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out tool Correcting mistakes If you change your mind about something you did you can undo the action If you change your mind again you can redo the action You can undo and redo all the operations you performed since you last saved the display one operation at a time The operations you perform between opening and closing a dialog box are treated as a single operation Operations you perform in the Property Panel are treated as separate operations To undo an operation m On the Edit menu click Undo or click the Undo tool To redo an operation m On the Edit menu click Redo or click the Redo tool Testing your displays as you work To test the objects in your displays as you work use the Test Display tool to switch
293. re rounded see page 7 2 m Ifthe message is too long to fit in the object the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk m When the Value connection s value is 0 the display is cleared m If you set up local messages in multiple languages messages are displayed in the current application language When a language switch occurs the message that was already in the local message display remains in the language that it originally appeared in New messages are displayed in the new language Printing displays You can print your graphic displays on the development computer This might be useful if you want other people to review the displays before implementing the application or if you want to keep a visual record of the displays You can also print graphic displays at run time to provide a printed record of process values such as trend data For information about printing on the development computer see page 2 13 19 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 30 Printing displays at run time When you print a display at run time everything on the screen is printed including the current display pop up windows and any visible background applications For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for applications that will run on a personal computer see page 15 10 For information about specifying printer options for applications that will run on a PanelView Plus or P
294. reen Clear alarm history button Print alarm history button Print Button in Alarm Status screen Print alarm status button Alarm Status Button Alarm History Button Goto display button Exit Button Close display button Alarm History List Alarm list Display Mode Button Alarm status mode button Time Display Time and date display During conversion the display is set up to show the time only The PanelBuilder 1400e time format is not converted For details about the FactoryTalk View time format see page 21 16 Date Display Time and date display During conversion the display is set up to show the date only The PanelBuilder 1400e date format is not converted For details about the FactoryTalk View date format see page 21 16 Arc with solid fill style Arc with solid back style and line The line graphic object is added because the solid Factory Talk View arc shape does not have a line between the two points of the arc FactoryTalk View arc with line FactoryTalk View arc A 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 8 Unsupported graphic objects These PanelBuilder 1400e objects are not supported in FactoryTalk View m Scrolling List includes Cursor List Multistate Indicator Object List Local Message Object List Numeric Data Display Object List Set Bit Cursor Point Unsupported settings and controls This section describes PanelBuilder 1400e settings and
295. rm messages in the alarm log file The report can include the time alarms occurred and were acknowledged For information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 To set up a print alarm history button 1 Double click the button Print Alarm History Button Properties Ed General Label Print Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color WB Back Color Back style Pattern style BB Border Color soa Nne E L Pattern Color oli v one i E Highlight color Shape I Blink Rectangle Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin jo jo Filtering Filtered triggers O dr Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to filter the alarms to include in the report m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m In the Print tab specify what information to print on the report m Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 56 Setting up print alarm status buttons 21 Setting up graphic objects The operator can press the print alarm status button to print a report of the status of alarms that have been defined for the application in the Alarm Setup editor The report can
296. rocess faceplates provide pre configured graphic displays that interact with the instructions in Logix5000 processors Using tag placeholders and parameter files To use the same graphic display with different sets of tags use tag placeholders and parameter files Using tag placeholders can be quicker than duplicating a display and setting up the objects in it to use a different set of tags especially when the display uses a lot of tags Using parameter files also reduces the size of the runtime application file Tag placeholders can provide a way to use one graphic display to represent a number of similar operations For example suppose you are creating displays for a plant that cans corn and peas The machinery used in both processes is identical Instead of creating two displays and specifying corn related tags in one display and pea related tags in another 20 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 2 you can create one display and not specify any tag names Where a tag name is required type a tag placeholder Use parameter files to specify which tags to substitute for which placeholders For information about using parameter files see page 25 3 You can use tag placeholders wherever you would normally assign a tag to an object including in expressions and embedded variables You can also use tag placeholders in the expressions you create to animate objects You can also use tag placeholders with global objects Y
297. rogrammable controller and remain set until the process is completed You can also use a latched push button when you have a controller with a long program or long update times When the operator presses a latched push button it changes the Value connection to one value and remains at that value until the Handshake connection gives the signal to unlatch the button The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up m The Handshake connection is unassigned The error state is also displayed when the display containing the latched push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a latched push button 1 Double click the latched push button 21 23 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 24 Latched Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 M Border uses back color Back style E Highlight color Solid Shape Rectangle Button settings Latch reset type Non zero Value Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo o Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run ti
298. ry Talk Local Directory restoring from runtime computer to development computer 14 6 Factory Talk loading directory of users and security policies 15 5 logging in 11 3 at runtime 11 3 single sign on 11 22 turning off warning 15 16 FactoryTalk Diagnostics 10 1 setting up on a personal computer 15 7 See also Diagnostics messages FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer tool 10 5 viewing diagnostics log files in 10 5 Windows Event Viewer 10 5 Factory Talk Directory security access to 11 19 FactoryTalk Security 11 1 Index permissions for converting runtime applications to development applications 14 6 setting up 11 14 turning off 11 2 users creating 11 17 FactoryTalk View FactoryTalk View ME Station 1 1 FactoryTalk View Studio 1 1 FactoryTalk View Machine Edition 1 1 FactoryTalk View ME Station exiting 15 5 starting on PanelView Plus CE terminals 16 3 on PanelView Plus terminals 16 3 on personal computers 15 4 15 11 supported versions 4 10 G 1 FactoryTalk View Studio main window 2 4 starting and exiting 2 1 FactoryTalk View tags importing 7 11 File names 4 2 and spaces 4 4 maximum length of 4 4 Fill animation 20 6 22 12 at run time 17 18 Folders 7 7 Fonts for multiple languages 20 13 in graphic displays substitution at run time 20 13 in trends 28 9 transferring 16 5 Foreground Color toolbar 20 32 Freehand graphic object 20 2 20 17
299. s In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects Buttons described later in the chapter Information about setting up these buttons is described later in the chapter Close display Multistate push Goto display Numeric input enable Interlocked push Print alarm history Latched push Print alarm status Macro Ramp Maintained push String input enable Momentary push How to use push buttons Push buttons start or stop processes or actions by changing tag values Never use push buttons for emergency stops Emergency stop buttons must always be hard wired You can use different kinds of push buttons depending on what kind of machinery you are running or process you are controlling Momentary push buttons change a tag to one value when the button is pressed and another value when the button is released The machine is on only while the button is held down When the button is released the machine turns off Momentary push buttons are useful for jogging a motor and they can be set up to start and stop a machine or process Maintained push buttons toggle between two values This type of button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process but not for starting the machine or process For example use the maintained push button for changing modes su
300. s For tips about creating slider objects see the previous section For more information about setting up vertical slider animation see Help Applying animation to groups You can apply animation to objects and then group those objects and apply animation to the group When the display is running animation is applied as follows These types of animation Are applied like this Color Animation attached to individual objects within the group overrides group animation Fill Animation results for both the individual objects and the group are applied Horizontal slider vertical slider Group animation overrides animation attached to individual objects within the group 22 Animating graphic objects These types of animation Are applied like this Height width horizontal Animation results for individual objects and the group are position vertical position and combined For example if an individual s horizontal position rotation animation result is to offset the object by 100 pixels and the group s result is to offset the group by 200 pixels the individual object is offset by 300 pixels Visibility When the group s animation visibility is False the group is not visible then no objects in the group are visible regardless of the animation status of the individual objects When the group s animation visibility is True the group is visible the visibility of an object within the group is determined by the individual o
301. s a template then duplicate the display each time you want to use the template To duplicate a component 1 Right click the component and then click Duplicate 2 Inthe Component name box type a name for the duplicate component 3 Click OK Printing Each component has a Print item on its File menu To print a component s contents 1 Open the component 2 On the File menu click Print 3 Click OK For information about selecting a printer and printing at run time see page 2 13 in Volume of the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User s Guide 18 5 C49 Using graphic displays This chapter describes the Graphics Images and Local Messages editors in the Graphics folder and outlines how to m use the Graphics editor m set up graphic displays m create a background for your displays m use graphic libraries m import graphic images m create local messages in your displays m print graphic displays at run time Before creating graphic displays specify project settings Project settings determine important aspects of your graphic display such as size and position For more information see page 4 11 For information about global object displays and the Parameters editor see Chapter 25 About graphic displays and graphic objects A graphic display represents the operator s view of plant activity The display can show system or process data and provide operators with a way to write values to an external data sourc
302. s data Interlocked push buttons have no Indicator connection For information about assigning tags see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up ramp buttons Use the ramp button to increase or decrease the value of a tag Ramp buttons can change a tag by either an integer or floating point value You can use two ramp buttons together to create an increment decrement control Each time the operator presses the button the tag value increases or decreases depending on how you set up the button To set up a ramp button 1 Double click the ramp button 21 27 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Ramp Button Properties x General Label Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color 4 BB Back color Back style Pattern style Border color Solid None _ Pattern color Shape E Highlight color Rectangle Blink Button settings Ramp up Upper limit Ramp value C Ramp down ft 00 fi Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin o lo Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m In the General tab specify what the button looks like and whether the button ramps a value up or down m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe Timing tab set up whe
303. s only not floating point numbers tagl tag2 returns a value of 78125 Be sure that any tag value you use as a divisor cannot at some point have a value of zero Expressions that attempt to divide a number by zero produce an error at run time String operands The operator can be used to join string operands For example the expression hello world returns helloworld You cannot join string tags to analog tags whether they are HMI or data server tags 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 8 Relational operators Relational operators compare two numeric or string values to provide a true or false result If the statement is true a value of 1 is returned If false O is returned The relational operators are Symbols Operator Numeric Example String Example For the numeric examples tag 5 and tag2 7 For the string examples serial_no STO09 EQ equal tagl tag2 serial_no ST009 false true NE lt gt not equal tagl lt gt tag2 serial_no lt gt ST011 true true LT lt less than tagl lt tag2 serial_no lt ST011 true true GT gt greater than tagl gt tag2 serial_no gt STO11 false false LE lt less than or equal to tag lt tag2 serial_no lt STOI1 true true GE gt greater than or equal to tagl gt tag2 serial_no gt ST011 false false How string operands are
304. s opened from a graphic display called Main Menu 1 Create these sets of tags You can use both HMI and data server tags Tag type Tag name Tag name String Corn_Name Pea_Name Analog Corn_Temp Pea_Temp Analog Corn_Weight Pea_Weight Analog Corn_Level Pea_Level 2 Create two parameter files called Corn and Peas containing these parameters Corn Peas 1 Corn_Name 1 Pea_Name 2 Corn_Temp 2 Pea_Temp 3 Corn_Weight 3 Pea_Weight 6 7 25 Using parameters and global objects Corn Peas 4 Corn_Level 4 Pea_Level In the Canning Overview display assign tag placeholders to the Value connections for these graphic objects This graphic object Uses this tag placeholder String display 1 Numeric display 1 2 Numeric display 2 3 Bar graph 4 Use descriptive text to illustrate the objects in the display In the Main Menu display create a display list selector for opening the Canning display with two states Assign the Corn parameter file to one state and the Peas parameter file to the other Call the captions for the states Corn and Peas respectively At run time when the operator selects the Peas state on the display list selector in the Main Menu and presses the Enter key the Canning Overview display opens and shows the values of the Pea_ tags When the operator selects the Corn state the values of the Corn_ tags are displayed 29 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE
305. s rp Recipe2 C Documents and Settings All fie oe n Enterprise mMeE HMI Projects Bakery RecipePlus organic cookies rpp Data Sets Data Set 1 from Recipel small batch Data Set 2 from Recipe2 Small batch Ingredients that are duplicated in Recipel Ingredients in Recipel that are not in Recipe2 baking powder butter Data Set 1 1 Data Set 2 2 eggs Data Set 1 4 Time and date formats The time and date in the report use the time and short date format for the current application language For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Printing recipes You can use the RecipePlus Editor to print recipe data sets For information about printing from editors see page 2 13 Creating RecipePlus objects You can create one RecipePlus table and RecipePlus selector per graphic display You can create multiple RecipePlus buttons in a display with a different action assigned to each The objects and button actions to use depend on how you want to use your recipe system For example if you just want to write data set values to tags all you need is a RecipePlus selector and a RecipePlus button with the download action For information about how the different objects in the recipe system work see page 29 2 29 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To create a recipe object 1 In the Graphics editor create or open a graphic display 2 Select a RecipePlus drawing tool by doing one of
306. see Help Unsupported feature in Graphic object FactoryTalk View Trend Blinking pens Date labels on the X Axis Background screen plotting A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Notes The date is displayed in the title You can plot tag values in the background by assigning the tags to a data log model Tags set up for background screen plotting are automatically assigned to a data log model on conversion However data log models do not plot expression values Therefore expressions set up for background screen plotting are not converted For information about data logging see Chapter 26 All objects PanelBuilder 1400e object name Object names are replaced with the FactoryTalk View default object names The PanelBuilder 1400e object name is used for the object s description You can view and edit the name and description in the Property Panel For details see Help All objects Caption and image placement FactoryTalk View supports one three or nine positions for captions and images depending on the type of object On conversion captions and images are positioned using the closest match Therefore some captions might overlap images some captions might be truncated and some images might be clipped to fit the object All objects Multiple image labels FactoryTalk View supports one image label per object or state If a PanelBuilder 1400e object is set up to use multiple image labe
307. set E B Back color Back style Pattern style o Border color Solid None _ Pattern color _ Fore color T Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial afo Hn Bl z uj EE CoC eee Iv Word wrap Cancel Help 2 In the object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the string display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the string display s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression whose data is displayed For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up string input enable buttons The operator can press the string input enable button to open a string pop up scratchpad or keyboard The operator can enter text in the scratchpad or keyboard and then send the string to the data source For more information about using the string input enable button at run time see page 17 6 To set up a string input enable button 1 Double click the string input enable button 21 Setting up graphic objects String Input Enable Properties x General Label String Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color ja BB Back color Back style Pattern style Border color Soid i ats None _ Pattern color Shape E Highl
308. set up in the Tags editor Only the tags that change by the specified percentage are logged If you specify a percentage of 0 all changes are logged If a tag does not have a minimum or maximum attribute for example a data server tag in Logix5000 when you specify on change logging all changes are logged for that tag You don t need to specify a percentage 26 Setting up data logging Using a heartbeat rate You can also specify a heartbeat rate to log values at specified times even if no tag value changes have occurred The heartbeat ensures that the data in the log file 1s current The heartbeat is also a good way to ensure that data logging is working and acquiring valid data The heartbeat cannot be less than the maximum update rate which is the rate at which data servers send tag values to FactoryTalk View If you specify a heartbeat of 0 the heartbeat is not used Tags in the data log model The data log model can contain up to 100 analog or digital tags including both HMI and data server tags You cannot use string tags array tags tag placeholders parameters or expressions in your data log model Deleting tags from the model If you delete a tag from the data log model previously logged data for the tag is not accessible unless you add the tag back to the model Changing the data log model used at run time Your application can run only one data log model at a time Follow this procedure to switch data log mode
309. splays called Logix_ALM_Config and Logix _ALM_ Status When you add process faceplates any graphic images associated with the faceplates are added to the Images folder To add process faceplates to an application 1 In the Explorer window right click the HMI server and then click Add Process Faceplates 25 Using parameters and global objects Add Process Faceplates Select the display types to add to the project Alarm SLM 3 displays Discrete 2 State Device D25D 2 displays Discrete 3 State Device D350 2 displays Enhanced PID PICE 6 displays Enhanced Select ESEL 2 displays Phase Manager PhaseM anager 1 display Ramp Soak AMPS 3 displays Totalizer TOT 3 displays Select All Clear All OF Cancel Help The Add Process Faceplates dialog box opens 2 Select the faceplates to add For details about selecting options in the dialog box see Help 25 15 P Setting up data logging This chapter describes steps for setting up data logging data log files data log models changing the data log model used at run time displaying data logs using the trend graphic object problems with data logging Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up data logging l In the Data Log Models editor set up a data log model that specifies how many log values to store the conditions that trigger data logging where to log data and which tags to monitor In the Startup edi
310. t The values in the recipe table are displayed using the number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol floating point values in the table use commas for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Numeric limits RecipePlus supports the range of numbers allowed by the VARIANT data type This range is 1 797693E 308 to 1 797693E 308 This range applies to the numbers that you enter in the RecipePlus Editor and it also applies to the tag values that are uploaded to the recipe file at run time 29 4 29 Setting up RecipePlus Specifying the runtime file location Use the RecipePlus Setup editor to specify the runtime file location Storing files outside the HMI project If you store the recipe files outside the HMI project the runtime application can use updated recipe files without creating a new runtime application mer file Storing recipe files outside the HMI project also allows you to use FactoryTalk View Studio to view and edit recipe data that is saved at run time without converting the mer file to an med file For more information see page 29 13 If you want to store recipe files outside of the HMI project at run time make sure you move the files from the application s RecipePlus folder to the specified runtime location before running the application This is the path to the RecipePlus folder
311. t parameters For more information about using parameter files and global object parameters see Chapter 25 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 To create a tag placeholder in an expression 1 Type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Constants A constant can have any of the following formats m integer 123 m floating point 123 45 m string constant character string 23 6 Arithmetic operators 23 Using expressions Arithmetic operators perform math on two or more numeric values and calculate the result The arithmetic operators are Symbol Operator addition subtraction R multiplication division MOD modulus remainder ne exponent Example For these examples tag 5 and tag2 7 tagl tag2 returns a value of 12 You can also use this operator with string operands See page 23 7 tagl tag2 returns a value of 2 tagl tag2 returns a value of 35 tagl tag2 returns a value of 0 7142857 tag2 MOD tagl returns a value of 2 The modulus operator is the remainder of one number divided by another In the example the remainder of 7 divided by 5 is 2 so 7 5 2 Important This operator is for integer
312. t Wizard see Help When you complete the steps of the wizard Factory Talk View Studio converts the PanelBuilder 1400e application creates the converted application s folders and files and then displays the converted application in the Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio If there are any messages about conversion they are displayed automatically in the Project Status dialog box The converted application is created in the ME HMI projects directory in a folder with the same name as the application name you specified in step 2 A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications This is the path to the ME HMI projects directory Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows 2000 Or Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Conversion messages are saved in a file called Convert log in the HMI projects directory To convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open 1 On the File menu click New Application or click the New Application tool L New Application If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application that is currently open Click Yes 2 Follow steps 2 through 6 in the previous procedure Equivalent graphic objects This section describes graphic objects that are equivalent in PanelBuilder 14
313. t cover all the details or variations in the equipment procedure or process described nor do they provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation operation or maintenance This product s implementation may vary among users This document is current as of the time of release of the product however the accompanying software may have changed since the release Rockwell Automation Inc reserves the right to change any information contained in this document or the software at anytime without prior notice It is your responsibility to obtain the most current information available from Rockwell when installing or using this product Doc ID VIEWME UMO005E EN E August 2007 C18 Working with components This chapter describes which editors have components working with components printing information in components For information on working with particular editors see the chapters later in this guide Editors that have components With some editors you enter information in a single window or a tabbed dialog box Other editors allow you to create multiple components such as graphic displays or message files Each component is stored in a separate file with its own name You can create components in these editors Graphics components include graphic displays global object displays and graphic libraries each in their own folder Parameters Local Messages Information Messages Data Log Models
314. ta log file is corrupted or invalid the file 1s deleted and recreated and an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If logging to a folder on a networked computer and the runtime computer is not logged in to the Windows domain of the network computer the log folder cannot be created An error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If logging to an invalid path the log folder cannot be created An error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics One of the reasons that the path might be invalid is that the top level folder of the path is not shared When the application starts FactoryTalk View checks whether there is disk space to store the data log model s data If there is not enough space an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics and data logging does not start 97 Using information messages This chapter describes m steps for setting up information messages m using the Information Messages and Information Setup editors m preparing to set up information messages how information messages work m creating information messages in multiple languages m the INFORMATION display m creating your own information message display m opening and closing the information message display m how the information message display graphic object works m changing the information message file used at run time About information messages Use information messages to give the operator messages about the pr
315. tag called tag1 Use tag s min and max property values Aaminn I Atman CE to test sliders econ Min 0 Max 100 C Read from tags 5 Apply Delete Close Help 22 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 8 5 In the display drag the rectangle to the position that will indicate the lowest number in the range ie 6 In the Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At minimum check box Horizontal offset Pixels At minimum I boo At masimum oo 7 In the display drag the rectangle to the position that will indicate the highest number in the range EF 8 Inthe Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At maximum check box Horizontal offset Pixels At minimun W oo At maximum w 9 To save the settings click Apply When you finish setting up the animation the rectangle returns to its original position Setting up the different types of animation This section describes the different types of animation and provides tips and examples for setting up animation Setting up visibility animation With visibility animation an object becomes visible or invisible based on a tag value or the result of an expression If an object is invisible it is inactive 22 Animating graphic objects Visibility animation is available for all objects Visibility animation overrides an object s Visible property If you use a tag s value to control visibility anim
316. tags Digital tags HMI tags PLC tags SLC tags String tags Structured tags System tags Test mode for animation 22 5 for graphic displays 19 10 for RecipePlus objects 29 10 for trends 28 10 Text graphic object 20 2 20 13 blinking 22 10 editing 20 14 Text strings exporting for translation 12 6 importing 12 13 translating in Excel 12 9 translating in Unicode file 12 9 Time and date atrun time 15 16 setting using global connections 8 2 system tags C 2 updating 8 2 Time and date display graphic object 20 6 21 55 at run time 17 19 Index specifying time and date format for 15 16 Time and date embedded variables 24 6 at runtime 24 8 Title bar and security 11 14 in graphic displays 4 15 Toolbars 2 4 Background Color toolbar 20 32 Foreground Color toolbar 20 32 in the Graphic Displays editor 19 7 showing and hiding 2 7 Standard toolbar 2 5 States toolbar 20 35 Tools Application Manager 4 10 DeskLock 11 2 15 17 Diagnostic Setup 10 6 Diagnostics Viewer 10 5 Tag Import and Export Wizard 7 11 Transfer Utility 16 6 Touch margins using on buttons 21 4 Touch screens positioning objects for 21 4 Transfer Utility tool 16 6 Translating application text in Excel 12 9 in Unicode 12 9 Transparent background style 19 21 Trend data printing at run time 28 12 remotely 28 12 Trend graphic object 20 6 28 1 and data logging 26 6 at runtime 17 18
317. tatus mode button 20 7 21 16 backspace button 20 7 21 16 21 48 bar graph 20 6 21 43 21 45 clear alarm banner button 20 7 21 16 clear alarm history button 20 8 21 17 close display button 20 4 21 36 control list selector 20 5 21 47 diagnostics clear all button 20 8 21 17 diagnostics clear button 20 7 21 17 diagnostics list 20 10 21 62 display list selector 20 4 21 37 display print button 20 4 21 17 drawing objects 20 1 arcs 20 2 20 16 circles 20 2 20 17 ellipses 20 2 20 17 freehand objects 20 2 20 17 images 20 2 20 14 lines 20 2 20 18 panels 20 2 20 16 polygons 20 2 20 18 polylines 20 3 20 18 rectangles 20 3 20 19 rounded rectangles 20 3 20 20 squares 20 3 20 19 text 20 2 20 13 wedges 20 3 20 16 end button 20 7 21 17 21 48 enter button 20 7 21 17 21 48 gauge 20 6 21 43 21 46 goto configure mode button 20 4 21 17 goto display button 20 4 21 35 home button 20 7 21 17 21 48 information acknowledge button 20 7 Index 21 17 information message display 20 10 21 63 interlocked push button 20 5 21 26 language switch button 20 4 21 17 latched push button 20 4 21 23 list indicator 20 6 21 42 local message display 20 10 21 53 login button 20 4 21 17 logout button 20 4 21 16 macro button 21 54 maintained push button 20 4 21 21 momentary push button 20 4 21 20 move down button 20 7 21 16 21 48 mo
318. tes connection must be a data server tag that supports arrays You cannot use an HMI tag Control list selectors have no Visible States connection m The state value of the item at the top of the list can be written to the Top Position connection when the list scrolls Control list selectors have no Top Position connection How piloted control list selectors work at run time A piloted control list selector can show several states at the same time but only one state can be selected at a time You can set up the piloted control list selector to be operator controlled or remote controlled by assigning tags or expressions in the Connections tab You can also set up individual states to be operator controlled remote controlled both or none If set to none the state is turned off If the piloted control list selector is set up to be operator controlled and the operator selects a remote controlled state or one that is turned off a hollow cursor is displayed 21 Setting up graphic objects Automatic Automatic The operator can select this state The operator cannot select this State Using buttons with the piloted control list selector When a piloted control list selector is operator controlled it works with m key button graphic objects These are graphic objects that duplicate the functions of keyboard keys m the arrow keys and Enter key on a terminal s keypad m the arrow keys and Enter key on a keyboard The o
319. the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor as well as the triggers and messages elements lt triggers gt Contains a trigger element for each trigger in the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor lt trigger id T1 gt Contains attributes for the first alarm trigger E 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Element lt trigger id T2 gt lt triggers gt lt messages gt lt message id M1 gt lt message id M2 gt lt messages gt lt alarm gt lt alarms gt Description Contains attributes for the second alarm trigger Indicates the end of the triggers element Contains a message element for each message in the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor Contains attributes for the first alarm message Contains attributes for the second alarm message Indicates the end of the messages element Indicates the end of the alarm element Indicates the end of the alarms element You can specify multiple attributes for an element For example the alarm element contains 11 possible attributes from the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor For more information about alarm elements and their attributes see Help for the Alarm Import Export Wizard E 4 _ Appenbrx F RFC1766 names This appendix describes RFC1766 names for Windows languages Mapping languages to RFC1766 names The following table lists the languages that Windows supports and the RFC1766 name ass
320. the Lines per alarm to 1 Alarm status list graphic object with a Fore color other than white Change the Fore color to white Features that are not supported in version 3 00 The features listed in the previous tables are not supported in version 3 00 of RS View ME Station In addition these version 3 10 features are not supported in version 3 00 The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Piloted control list selector graphic Delete the object Try using a control list selector instead object Do this Alarm banner graphic object with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Alarm trigger with Message Notification connection assigned Clear the tag or expression assigned to the connection G 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To remove or replace this feature Alarm trigger with Message Handshake connection assigned Do this Clear the tag or expression assigned to the connection G 6 _ Appenbrx H Importing and exporting graphics XML files This appendix describes m creating graphics XML files m exporting editing and importing XML files m the graphics XML file structure About XML XML is the Extensible Markup Language used to create documents with structured text information It has a standardized format and structure You can use XML to edit the elements and attributes needed to create an
321. the best fit for the current data be derived from a pen s minimum and maximum values use a constant value or be controlled by tags You can set up the trend so all pens use the same scale or use individual ranges for each pen If you choose the latter method create a next pen button in the graphic display to allow operators to view the range for each pen When the operator presses the button the vertical axis changes to the new pen s range For example if Pen 1 has a minimum value of 10 and a maximum value of 100 the range on the vertical axis is 10 to 100 when the pen is selected If Pen 2 has a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 50 the range on the vertical axis changes to 10 to 50 when the operator presses the next pen button X axis The x axis is the bottom horizontal edge of the chart It is also known as the horizontal axis Horizontal axis labels For standard charts the horizontal axis labels indicate the time span covered by the trend For XY Plot charts the horizontal axis labels show the scale range of values for the pen selected to serve as the x axis pen If desired you can set up the trend to omit the horizontal axis labels The number of labels depends on the size of the trend object and the number of vertical grid lines Pens Pens are the lines and symbols used to represent values The values can be tags you are monitoring expressions that manipulate tag values or constants 28 Setting up trends I
322. the file to import 5 Click Open The file is converted to drawing objects and grouped and then the grouped object is placed in the graphic display Using ActiveX objects ActiveX objects use tags or expressions to exchange information with the data source The properties and connections available for a particular ActiveX object depend on the third party vendor s implementation ActiveX objects support visibility animation only If your application will run on a PanelView Plus CE terminal the ActiveX object must be available for both the development system running on Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 and the PanelView Plus CE terminal platform Make sure you install and register the Windows CE version of the ActiveX object on the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus terminals do not support ActiveX objects To create an ActiveX object 1 Select the ActiveX Control tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the object is the size you want 20 21 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 22 Insert an Activex Control RotateB yr Class ASLin Comm Control ASLin Hardware Tree Control Cancel ASMLangSwitchButton Class ASMMacroButton Class Help ASOPCBrowse Control AT AReportbrowser Control Scalebyr Class scriptContral Object Register Search Assistant Control SelectFile Class Unregister SeltBwr Class Shelsel Class Chelsie Clank Tbe
323. the following m Inthe Objects toolbox click the RecipePlus Button RecipePlus Selector or RecipePlus Table tool m On the Objects menu select RecipePlus and then click RecipePlus Button RecipePlus Selector or RecipePlus Table 3 Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the object 4 Double click the object to open its Properties dialog box 5 Set up the object For details see Help Once you have set up a RecipePlus object you can edit it as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on You can also use the object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For more information about graphic objects see Chapter 20 Testing RecipePlus objects l Test Display tool Edit Display tool You can quickly test the recipe objects in a display by switching to test mode If communications are active and there is data for the tags you can download and upload recipe tag values When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes 1 On the View menu click Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Using the RecipePlus_ Components graphic library
324. ther or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 12 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag with which the button exchanges data Ramp buttons have no Indicator connection For information about assigning tags see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up numeric displays Use the numeric display object to show the operator numeric information from the data source For example you might use a numeric display to show the current temperature of an oven 21 28 21 Setting up graphic objects How values are displayed The numeric display shows the value of the Value connection at the data source The value shown depends on whether the Value connection value is a floating point number or an integer Integer values are displayed as is Floating point values are rounded to fit the display The decimal places option also affects how floating point numbers are displayed For example if the numeric display is set up to show 6 digits with one decimal place 1234 56 is rounded to 1234 6 1234 44 is rounded to 1234 4 The decimal counts as one of the digits For more information about how values are rounded see page 7 2
325. ting 25 3 See also Global object parameters Parameters editor 25 3 using tags in 6 5 Password button graphic object 20 4 21 17 using at runtime 17 4 Passwords changing at runtime 17 4 for RS View 3 20 and earlier users 11 7 for Windows users in RS View 3 20 and earlier applications 11 8 for FactoryTalk Security users managing 11 21 uploading runtime changes to development application 14 6 Pause button graphic object 20 7 21 17 Piloted control list selector graphic object a 20 5 21 50 controlling remotely 21 51 differences from control list selectors a 21 50 using Enter key handshaking with 21 13 Placeholders See Tag placeholders PLC tags importing 7 9 Polygon graphic object 20 2 20 18 Polyline graphic object 20 3 20 18 Preconfigured graphic displays ALARM display 9 6 DIAGNOSTICS display 10 10 INFORMATION display 27 6 Print alarm history button graphic object a 20 4 21 56 specifying time and date format for 15 17 using to print alarm information 9 10 using with alarm objects 9 36 Print alarm status button graphic object 20 4 21 57 using to print alarm information 9 10 using with alarm objects 9 36 Printers selecting on the development computer a 2 14 specifying at run time on personal computers a 15 10 type to use with Panel View Plus and PanelView Plus CE 16 1 16 2 Problems at run time communication errors viewing 17 20 data logging 26 6 displaying numeric
326. ting states 20 35 Multistate indicator graphic object 20 6 21 39 at run time 17 18 using with recipes 29 10 Multistate push button graphic object 20 5 21 24 at run time 17 16 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 N Navigation between graphic displays 13 1 testing 13 3 between graphic objects in a display 21 7 Next pen button graphic object 20 7 21 17 using to change trend s vertical axis labels a 28 6 28 11 Normally closed push button 21 20 Normally open push button 21 20 Number format at run time 15 16 Numeric display graphic object 20 9 21 28 28 10 at run time 17 17 specifying number format for 15 16 Numeric embedded variables 24 3 at runtime 24 7 Numeric input cursor point graphic object a 20 9 21 32 at runtime 17 16 17 17 navigating to 21 7 using Enter key handshaking with 21 13 Numeric input enable button graphic object a 20 9 21 30 at run time 17 6 17 16 how values are calculated 17 9 how values are ramped 17 9 navigating to 21 7 using Enter key handshaking with 21 13 using write expressions with 23 19 I 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE I 14 Numeric pop up windows using at run time 17 7 Numeric values ramping at run time 17 7 using graphic objects to display and enter a 20 9 O Object Explorer 20 24 opening 20 25 using to highlight objects 20 25 viewing animation in 20 25 viewing tag and expression assignme
327. ting up 5 1 testing on the development computer 14 2 Components 2 11 18 1 adding into applications 18 3 file locations 4 2 printing 2 13 18 5 security for 11 18 working with 18 1 Connections 20 2 assigning to graphic objects 20 36 using the Property Panel 20 31 expressions 20 2 for alarms 9 4 9 17 9 23 tags 20 2 Constants in expressions 23 6 Context menus 19 5 Control list selector graphic object 20 5 21 47 atrun time 17 17 differences from piloted control list selectors a 21 50 linking buttons to 21 9 navigating to 21 7 using Enter key handshaking with 21 13 Current trends 26 6 28 2 D Data log files 4 3 26 1 Data log models changing the model to use at run time a 26 5 deleting tags from 26 5 Data Log Models editor 26 2 using tags in 6 12 Data logging 26 1 choosing the data to log 26 5 methods 26 4 problems with 26 6 setting up 26 1 storage locations 26 3 to monitor memory usage 8 8 Data server tags 6 1 browsing for 6 5 how to use 6 3 when to use 6 3 Data servers 2 8 4 1 5 2 creating 5 4 synchronizing caches for 5 5 Data sets for recipes 29 1 comparing 29 7 printing 29 9 Data source ensuring values are read by 21 13 for alarms 9 3 for HMI tags 7 5 for information messages 27 3 for local messages 19 27 for tags 6 2 7 5 for trends 28 2 Default graphic displays ALARM display 9 6 DIAGNOSTICS display
328. tion and the data source If the connection is a read connection arrow points left data flows from the data source to the object If the connection is a write connection arrow points right data flows from the object to the data source If the connection is a read and write connection double headed arrow data flows in both directions For more information about using the Property Panel to assign tags and expressions to an object s connections see Help For more information about assigning tags and expressions to objects see page 20 36 Coloring objects using the color toolbars The Foreground Color and Background Color toolbars contain a selection of colors you can assign to objects color properties 20 Using graphic objects About color properties The number of color properties an object has depends on the type of object and how you set it up For example a button with states can use up to seven different colors for each state When you select colors using the color toolbars some properties are assigned the foreground color and some are assigned the background color Other color properties such as Fill color cannot be assigned using the color toolbars instead use the object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel This table lists the color properties you can assign using the color toolbars Property Foreground color Background color Back color No Yes Background color No Yes Border color Yes No Caption c
329. to 10 000 messages in each message file For details about using the Local Messages editor see Help Preparing to set up local messages As your application is running information is continually sent to the data source about the state of various processes For example your application might be monitoring whether a valve is open or closed or the temperature in a boiler Values representing the status of these processes are sent to the data source The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source 19 Using graphic displays is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling Identifying the tags and values to monitor To set up local messages determine which tags associated with machine processes to monitor and identify the values for those tags that will trigger local messages For information about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 How local messages work These are the key parts of the local message system Local message files text files containing lists of messages with a numeric trigger value for each message
330. to write all the values in the Recipe column to the tags associated with the ingredients The values are downloaded to the data source Viewing data values that are saved at run time Use the RecipePlus Editor in FactoryTalk View Studio to view data values that have been saved at run time The operator can save tag values at run time by uploading to an existing data set or to a new data set The operator can also edit data set values in the RecipePlus table and save the edited values unless the table is View only If recipe files are stored with the HMI project changes are saved in the mer file To view the changes in FactoryTalk View Studio convert the mer file to an med file For more information about converting the runtime application file see page 14 6 To view data values in modified recipe files 1 If recipe files are stored outside of the HMI project do one of the following m Add the recipe file rpp that you saved at run time into the application using Add Component Into Application for details see page 18 3 m If the recipe file already exists in the application you can just copy the modified file back into the application s RecipePlus folder For the path to the RecipePlus folder see page 29 5 2 If recipe files are stored with the HMI project and you have not already done so convert the runtime application file to a development application as described on page 14 6 29 13 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHI
331. ton s Properties dialog box type the number of pixels for the touch margins in the Horizontal margin and Vertical margin boxes m Inthe Properties tab of the Property Panel type the number of pixels for the HorizontalMargin and VerticalMargin properties Assigning function keys to buttons You can assign function keys to the buttons in your displays to allow the operator to press the buttons using the function keys on the runtime terminal or the function keys on a keyboard if one is available You can also assign a function key to the numeric input cursor point You can assign up to 34 function keys to each graphic display Here are some tips for assigning function keys m Where possible use the same function keys for the same operations in all your graphic displays For example if every display contains a goto display button that returns the operator to a graphic display called Main Menu assign the same function key to this button in each display m Include the name of the function key assigned to a button in a caption on the button For buttons with multiple states include the function key name in the caption for each state or create a text object to use as a label for the button so that you don t have to set up the caption for each state and then group the text and button together If your application will run on a PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal assign keys that are supported by the runtime termina
332. tor turn on data logging by selecting the Data logging check box Also use this editor to specify the data log model to use at run time See Chapter 14 In the Graphics editor create a graphic display containing the trend graphic object and set up how the object looks which tag values to display the start time and the time span for the data Also specify the name of the data log model to use Data log files As soon as the application starts running FactoryTalk View begins logging tag values to the data log files When the maximum number of data points have been logged the oldest data is deleted to make room for the new data FactoryTalk View supplies data from the log files to the trend object for the requested tags and time span The data log files are retained when you restart an application after a shutdown or power loss You can delete the log files from the runtime computer at application startup Use data logging to keep a permanent record of tag data You can record tag data as tag values change or on a periodic basis for example every minute For information about deleting the log files see page 15 15 26 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 26 2 File names FactoryTalk View creates two data log files m Data Log Model Name log m Data Log Model Name tag You ll need this information if you log to a custom path and want to delete the log files manually Data Log Models A data log model defines
333. ts of a trend The illustration below shows a standard trend chart with three pens and a two minute time span Two of the pens have markers The third uses digital plotting For more information about chart types see page 28 7 Sunday December 31 2000 Trend bord are fa Pen marker Trend window i T o l aa oan a aa a Dan an oas as a ad as as as aa aa aanl aes as an a a a oa oa Pen icon Chart Digital plotting y axis Vertical axis label CAA A A A C C A C C C C ea Pen marker 12 54 50 Phd 12 55 14 12 55 38 12 56 26 12 56 50 PM x axis Horizontal axis label Trend border The border appears around the trend object at run time when the trend is selected Trend window The area around the chart between the border and the chart is the trend window 28 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 28 6 Chart The chart is the area of the trend in which values are plotted It is bounded by the y axis on the left and the x axis on the bottom It contains the plotted trend data shown using pen lines and pen markers as well as grid lines Gf you choose to display them Y axis The y axis is the left vertical edge of the chart It is also known as the vertical axis Vertical axis labels The vertical axis labels show the scale range of values for the pens If desired you can set up the trend to omit the vertical axis labels The minimum and maximum values for the scale can be determined automatically using
334. u Pakistan uz UZ Cyrl Uzbek Cyrillic Uzbekistan uz UZ Latn Uzbek Latin Uzbekistan vi VN Vietnamese Vietnam F 5 APPEN IX G CA an Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View This appendix describes m which versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station are supported m which features are not supported in previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station Which versions are supported FactoryTalk View Studio allows you to create runtime mer files for these versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station m FactoryTalk View ME Station version 5 00 m RSView ME Station version 4 00 m RSView ME Station version 3 20 m RSView ME Station version 3 10 m RSView ME Station version 3 00 Multiple version support is useful for system designers and others who create and modify applications for different versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station on an ongoing basis You can use the latest version of FactoryTalk View Studio on a single development computer to provide applications for terminals that use previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station To check which version of FactoryTalk View ME Station you are using 1 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings 2 Click System Information 3 Click About FactoryTalk View ME Station Creating runtime application files for previous versions When you create the runtime application file with the file extension mer you can specify t
335. u assign to groups of users run each time any member of the group logs in or logs out Global Connections Specify the tags or expressions that will run the macros named Macrol to MacroS 30 4 _ Appenbrx A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications This appendix describes terms that are different in PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View steps for converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications names of equivalent graphic objects in the two products PanelBuilder 1400e graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder 1400e settings and controls that are not supported in FactoryTalk View how communications are converted and which PanelBuilder 1400e communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View converting PanelBuilder 1400e Remote I O communications PanelBuilder 1400e graphic object features that are not supported in FactoryTalk View with information about how to achieve the same result when possible converting PanelBuilder 1400e expressions PanelBuilder 1400e applications are applications you create using PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows For information about converting applications from PanelBuilder or PanelBuilder32 see Appendix B You can convert PanelView 1200 applications to PanelBuilder 1400e applications and then convert the PanelBuilder 1400e applications to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition applications Terminology This section
336. u can use the same file of messages for multiple local message display objects Local messages versus information messages Use local messages to give the operator information in a specific graphic display while the display is open To give the operator information no matter which display is open use information messages For details about information messages see Chapter 27 19 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 26 Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up local messages 1 In the Local Messages editor set up the messages and their trigger values 2 Inthe Graphics editor create local message display objects in the graphic displays in which you want the messages to appear at run time For each local message display assign a tag or expression to the Value connection and specify the file of messages to display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up local message display objects see page 21 53 Using the Local Messages editor Use the Local Messages editor to create one or more files of local messages Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple message files at the same time i Tank Pumphouse Local Messages Triggerale Message O af Inlet valve is apen Inlet valve is closed Outlet valve is oper Outlet valve iz closed Tank ts filling Tank i draining You can define up
337. use this syntax LN Tag_name Fill_character DP where L optional indicates it is a literal constant number This symbol prevents a tag read If you type a tag placeholder for the Jag_name the value of the placeholder is substituted from the parameter file or global object parameter definition N indicates it s a numeric embedded variable indicates the number of digits 24 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 4 Tag_name is the tag to display you can also type a literal number or tag placeholder here Fill character is the fill character to use NOFILL ZEROFILL or SPACEFILL indicates the number of decimal places Examples Numeric embedded variable syntax To display the current value of a tag called Oven_temp with 3 digits no decimal places and no fill character type this N 3 Oven_temp NOFILL DP 0 To display the constant 48 with 3 decimal places and 2 zeroes to the left of the number for a total length of 8 digits including the decimal type this LN 8 48 ZEROFILL DP 3 At runtime the numeric embedded variable would look like this 0048 000 String embedded variable syntax Use string embedded variables to insert string tag values into captions title bars and messages You can also insert literal strings of static text For example you can type a word or phrase a tag placeholder or a number To control how constant numbers are displayed use a literal num
338. ush button 1 Double click the maintained push button Maintained Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 I Border uses back color E Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Nest state based on Curent State Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin 0 0 Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and how the button changes state m Inthe States tab specify what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 m Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 21 Setting up graphic objects For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up latched push buttons The latched push button latches in the On position and must be unlatched by another button or process to return to the Off position This type of button is useful for starting a machine or process For example use the latched push button when you want the Value connection to start a process within a p
339. ush button 1 Double click the multistate push button General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width T M Border uses back color E Highlight color Back style Shape State settings Number of states Next state based on 2 Current State Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin o oOo Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like and how the button changes state m Inthe States tab specify what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 2 m Inthe Timing tab set up whether or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 12 21 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 26 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up interlocked push buttons Multiple interlocked push buttons work together and share the same t
340. using Enter key handshaking see page 21 13 m Inthe Common tab specify the piloted control list selector s spacial properties name and visibility 21 52 21 Setting up graphic objects m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the piloted control list selector exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up local message displays Use local message displays to provide the operator with information about what to do next or with information about a process At run time the local message display shows one message at a time To use local messages create a local message display object in a graphic display and then assign a local message file to the local message display object For more information about local messages see page 19 25 If no message exists for the trigger value that matches the value of the Value connection the display is filled with question marks To set up a local message display 1 Double click the local message display Local Message Display Properties x General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset a BB Back color Back style Pattern style BB Border color Soid a None _ Pattern color L Fore color F Blink Text Font Size Alignment for o J wiz w
341. utside the border to add them to the selection All objects in the drawing area or in a group you are editing On the Edit menu click Select All or press Ctrl A Deselecting objects To deselect An object Do this Ctrl click the object Several objects Press and hold Ctrl and then drag a selection border around the objects All selected objects Click in the Drawing area away from any objects Using the Object Explorer Use the Object Explorer to view and select objects from a tree list of all the objects in a display Groups are listed as expandable items in the tree with a icon Use the Object Explorer to select an object that is hidden behind other objects in the display without bringing the object to the front Objects are listed in front to back order The object you created most recently is at the front unless you move it back using the Send to Back option For more information about layering objects see page 20 49 You can also use the Object Explorer to highlight objects by object type highlight objects that have animation attached and to highlight objects with specific tag or expression assignments For more information see page 20 25 aT Show Hide Object Explorer tool 20 Using graphic objects The Object Explorer does not show wallpaper objects nor objects within ActiveX composite objects To open the Object Explorer use one of these methods m On the Graphics toolbar
342. values 21 29 displaying trend data 28 12 logging in 17 4 printing from a Panel View Plus CE terminal 16 1 printing from a Panel View Plus terminal 16 2 using the numeric pop up windows 17 10 using the string pop up windows 17 15 Index Problems at runtime memory usage 8 7 Problems during application development exporting text for translation 12 8 importing alarm XML files E 3 importing graphics XML files H 3 importing text 12 13 navigating through displays 13 3 Opening applications 2 3 4 9 Process faceplates 25 1 adding to a new application 4 5 adding to an existing application 25 13 selecting tags for 6 6 25 13 using global object parameters with 25 11 Project files location of 4 2 viewing 4 18 Project Settings editor 4 17 Project window size 4 11 4 12 changing 4 13 Projects versus applications 4 1 Properties dialog box opening 20 28 setting up objects in 20 26 using to assign connections to graphic objects 20 36 20 38 Property Panel opening 20 30 setting up objects in 20 30 using to assign connections to graphic objects 20 31 Push buttons 21 19 R RAM usage monitoring at runtime 8 7 Ramp button graphic object 20 5 20 38 21 27 atrun time 17 16 setting up auto repeat for 21 12 Range of motion for animation 22 6 Read connection 20 31 Read write connection 20 31 I 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE I 16 Real
343. ve left button 20 7 21 16 move right button 20 7 21 16 move up button 20 7 21 16 21 48 multistate indicator 20 6 21 39 multistate push button 20 5 21 24 next pen button 20 7 21 17 numeric display 20 9 21 28 numeric input cursor point 20 9 21 32 numeric input enable button 20 9 21 30 page down button 20 7 21 17 21 48 page up button 20 7 21 17 21 48 password button 20 4 21 17 pause button 20 7 21 17 piloted control list selector 20 5 21 50 print alarm history button 20 4 21 56 print alarm status button 20 4 21 57 ramp button 20 5 21 27 RecipePlus button 20 9 21 17 29 3 RecipePlus selector 20 9 29 2 RecipePlus table 20 9 29 2 reset alarm status button 21 17 reset alarm status mode button 20 8 return to display button 20 4 21 17 scale m 20 6 21 43 21 47 shutdown button 20 4 21 17 Silence alarms button 20 8 21 17 sort alarms button 20 8 21 17 string display 20 9 21 33 string input enable button 20 9 21 34 symbol 20 6 21 40 time and date display 20 6 21 55 trend 20 6 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE I 10 Graphic objects 19 1 20 1 aligning 20 50 animating 22 2 arranging 20 49 20 53 assigning connections to 20 36 using the Property Panel 20 31 coloring 20 32 converting to wallpaper 19 14 copying 20 42 creating 20 12 selecting tools for 20 10 deleting 20 46 deselecting 20 23 duplicating 20 43
344. w Plus or PanelView Plus CE 16 6 transferring to Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE 16 5 using earlier versions of FactoryTalk View a G l using earlier versions of RSView 4 10 versus projects 4 1 Arc graphic object 20 2 20 16 Index Arithmetic operators in expressions 23 7 evaluation order of 23 11 Array tags 9 15 data types for 9 15 9 16 Arrow images 19 20 Audiences for diagnostics messages 10 4 Auto repeat 21 12 AutoCAD files See dxf files Automatic logout 11 13 11 23 B Background Color toolbar 20 32 Background style transparent 19 21 Backing tags 6 6 25 13 using with global object parameters 25 11 Backspace button graphic object 20 7 21 16 21 48 Bar graph graphic object 20 6 21 43 21 45 at run time 17 18 using animation to create 22 10 using with recipes 29 10 Base objects assigning global object parameters to a 25 11 25 12 breaking links to 25 10 creating 25 7 deleting 25 10 editing 25 9 Bit arrays using to generate alarms based on priority sequence 9 13 using to generate multiple alarms 9 12 Bit trigger type 9 12 Bitmap files See bmp files Bitwise operators in expressions 23 9 evaluation order of 23 11 Bounding box 21 5 Button graphic objects bounding box 21 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE creating touch margins for 21 4 linking to specific objects 21 9 repeating button presses 21 12 selectin
345. w communications that do not use Remote I O RIO are converted For information about converting RIO communications see page B 8 FactoryTalk View does not use nodes for communications Nodes are converted to RSLinx topics Topics are then converted into device shortcuts to run with RSLinx Enterprise You must have both RSLinx Classic and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two step conversion If you import an application multiple times delete the device shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise before re importing Otherwise multiple unused topics will be created in RSLinx Enterprise For more information about setting up communications see Chapter 5 Tags for unsupported communication protocols Some communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View For example DH communications that use the AutoMax node type are not supported FactoryTalk View does not support CIP and Assembly Object addressing used in PanelBuilder32 Ethernet communications Tags that use unsupported communication protocols are converted to HMI memory tags Once you have set up communications for your converted application change the memory tags to device tags that point to the correct addresses All other imported tags are converted to HMI device tags For information about editing HMI tags see Chapter 7 For more information about which communication protocols are not supported see Help or see the Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase
346. with the objects you create It describes how to select and deselect objects use the Object Explorer to view and select objects use an object s Properties dialog box to set up the object s properties and assign tags and expressions to its connections use the Property Panel to set up individual and group object properties and to assign tags and expressions to individual objects connections color objects name objects test how objects look in different states Selecting and deselecting objects To work with an object you must first select it You can use the Select tool or the Object Explorer to select objects For information about using the Object Explorer see page 20 24 To select the Select tool On the Objects menu click Select or on the Objects toolbar click the Select tool The mouse pointer changes to a single arrow 20 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 24 Selecting objects To select An object or group of objects Do this Click the object or group In the Object Explorer click the object or group An object within a group of objects Double click the group and then click the object In the Object Explorer open the group and then click the object Several objects Click the first object and then Ctrl click additional objects All objects in an area Click and drag diagonally to draw a selection border around the objects Ctrl click objects o
347. working with 2 10 Ellipse graphic object 20 2 20 17 Embedded variables 24 1 displaying at run time 24 7 in title bars 19 13 syntax for 24 3 types of values 24 1 updating at runtime 24 6 End button graphic object 20 7 21 17 21 48 using with alarm objects 9 38 using with diagnostics lists 10 12 using with recipes 29 12 using with trends 28 12 Enter button graphic object 20 7 21 17 21 48 and Enter key handshaking 21 13 using with alarm objects 9 8 9 38 using with recipes 29 12 Enter key handshaking 21 13 Error messages See Diagnostics messages Problems at run time Exporting alarm files 9 4 E 1 global object displays H 1 graphic displays 19 4 H 1 problems with 12 8 text for translation 12 6 Expression editor 23 2 using tags in 6 5 Expression results rounding 23 1 types of values 23 2 Expressions 23 1 and animation 22 6 assigning to connections 6 11 assigning to graphic objects 20 36 using the Property Panel 20 31 constants in 23 6 evaluation order of operators 23 11 formatting 23 5 if then else logic in 23 17 language function in 23 15 math functions in 23 14 monitoring for alarms 9 4 operators in arithmetic 23 7 bitwise 23 9 logical 23 8 relational 23 8 security functions in 23 15 tags and placeholders in 23 5 viewing in Object Explorer 20 25 write expressions 23 19 F Faceplates See Process faceplates Facto
348. xample shows how to set up the data source to notify the operator that a conveyor belt has stopped In this example the status of two conveyor belts is being monitored You can use both HMI and data server tags 1 Create a digital tag called Conveyor_1_status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to a sensor on the first conveyor belt When the belt is running the tag s value is 0 When the belt stops running the value changes to l 2 Create a second digital tag called Conveyor_2_status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to a sensor on the second conveyor belt When the belt is running the tag s value is 0 When the belt stops running the value changes to 1 3 Create an analog tag called Information_messages Set up the data source to send a value of 1 to this tag when Conveyor_1_status has a value of 1 and to send a value of 2 to this tag when the Conveyor_2_ status tag has a value of 1 4 Inthe Information Messages editor create these messages with trigger values matching the values that will be sent to the Information_messages tag Trigger value Message 1 Conveyor belt 1 has stopped 2 Conveyor belt 2 has stopped 27 Using information messages Save the message file with the name Conveyor belts 5 In the Information Setup editor assign the Information_messages tag to the Value connection and select the Conveyor belts message file
349. y changing the reference objects LinkConnections property to False and the LinkAnimations property to Link without expressions The global object parameter takes the same form as a regular parameter where can be any number from 1 to 500 The parameter can be the placeholder for an individual tag or for a folder of tags For example 1 could be a placeholder for the path to the folder containing the PIDE tags assigned to the global object When you set up the base object specify the global object parameters to use with the object You can provide a description of each parameter to remind you or another application designer of the type of value to assign to the parameter on the reference object Then assign specific values to each parameter for the reference object You can assign numeric or string constants tags or backing tags Difference between global object parameters and regular parameters Global object parameters allow you to assign different values to different instances of the same placeholder For example each reference object in the display might have the placeholder 1 Using regular parameter files you could only assign one value to 1 and this would apply to all objects in the graphic display With global object parameters you can assign a different value to 1 for each object that uses the placeholder 1 If a placeholder is defined in a global object parameter for an individual object and defined in a parameter file
350. y the tags or expression whose data is displayed For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 36 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up numeric input enable buttons The operator can press the numeric input enable button to open a numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad The operator can enter a number in the keypad or scratchpad and then send the number to the data source For more information about using the numeric input enable button at run time see page 17 6 You can also set up the numeric input enable button to work as a ramp button In this case when the button has focus the operator can press a move up or move down button to change a tag by either an integer or floating point value The operator can also press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow on the keyboard or keypad to ramp the value 21 Setting up graphic objects To set up a numeric input enable button 1 Double click the numeric input enable button General Label Numeric Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color ja BB Back color Back style Pattern style BB Border color Solid M None _ Patter color Shape O Highlight color Rectangle Blink Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other M Audio Key navigation Take focus on press OK Cancel Help ok 2 Inthe button s Properties
351. y to see limits Gauges display numeric values in dial format They are useful for displaying a value in relation to its lower and upper limits For example a temperature gauge shows the current temperature in relation to its minimum and maximum extremes By looking at the position of the needle on the gauge pointing left up or right the operator can tell at a glance whether the temperature is nearer its lower limit nearer the middle or nearer its upper limit Gauges are used instead of numeric displays when it s important for the operator to recognize an abnormal condition instantly either from far away when the scale on the gauge isn t visible or before the operator has had the opportunity to determine the exact reading on the gauge This characteristic of gauges is one of the reasons why they are used in automobile instrumentation Thresholds change a gauge s fill color As the needle sweeps higher on a gauge the gauge can fill the area behind the needle with a color The gauge can change its fill color to help an operator recognize abnormal conditions The change in color happens when the tag or expression value crosses a threshold you set up for the gauge For example m Ifthe temperature of an oven is lower than required for a recipe the gauge can show the temperature in blue m Ifthe temperature is in the correct range for the recipe the gauge can show the temperature in green 21 Setting up graphic objects m I
352. yboard to navigate to and select objects If a mouse or touch screen is not available on the runtime computer the operator can use the keys on a keyboard or keypad to select give focus to these objects m lists control list selector piloted control list selector display list selector diagnostics list alarm list and alarm status list m alarm banners m trends m numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons m numeric input cursor points m RecipePlus table and selector m third party ActiveX input objects What input focus looks like The object with focus is surrounded by a highlight box unless the Disable Highlight When Object has Focus box is selected in the Display Settings dialog box You can specify the color of the highlight in this dialog box as well For more information see Help FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 8 or Highlight bo Manual Automatic Focus highlight for ActiveX and trend objects For ActiveX and trend objects use the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box to specify whether or not to display a highlight box For more information about setting up options on the Common tab see page 21 1 If the Disable Highlight When Object has Focus box is checked in the Display Settings dialog box that setting overrides the setting you specify in the Common tab Using the keys on the keyboard or keypad When a graphic display opens the keyboard navigable
353. ype of printer you use pen lines with a width of 1 pixel might not appear in the printout Choose high contrast colors and wider line widths to ensure that the trend data prints clearly Runtime errors for the trend If data for the trend is not available at run time due to communication errors a message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics 28 12 See Help for information about solving common trend problems 28 Setting up trends 28 13 C20 Setting up RecipePlus This chapter describes m what recipes are m summary of steps for creating a recipe system m how the recipe system works m specifying the runtime location of recipe files m creating recipe files m comparing recipes m creating RecipePlus buttons selectors and tables m testing RecipePlus objects m using objects from the RecipePlus_Components graphic library m using buttons with the recipe objects m viewing data values that are saved at run time About recipes A recipe is a set of numeric and string data values ingredients that can be downloaded to their associated tags at the data source Each ingredient has a pre set data value assigned to it The set of data values for all the ingredients in a recipe is called a data set The set of numeric and string tags assigned to the ingredients in the recipe is called a tag set The ingredients data sets and tag sets are stored together in a recipe file You can create different pairs of data sets a
354. ywhere a tag or expression is required You can also type placeholders in embedded variables by using a literal string embedded variable For information about embedded variables see Chapter 24 Right click the global object or grouped global object and then click Global Object Parameter Definitions Global Object Parameter Definitions Mame OoOo Dein OOS OZO al EEREPPFEPELT Pree E Cancel Help 3 Specify a parameter for each placeholder for the object If desired type a description for each parameter For details about using the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box see Help To specify the parameter values for the reference object 1 25 12 Right click the reference object or grouped reference object and then click Global Object Parameter Values 25 Using parameters and global objects Global Object Parameter Values Name Value Tag Description 1 i eee Assign a PID enhanced tag to this object Cancel Help 2 Specify a value for each parameter The value can be a tag backing tag or numeric or string constant Numeric constants are treated as strings of text For details about using the Global Object Parameter Values dialog box see Help Using process faceplates Process faceplates are pre configured graphic displays and global object displays that interact with Logix5000 processors Process faceplates contain graphic objects that display values from

FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents